Canon EOS 77D User manual

Canon EOS 77D User manual
Instruction Manual
Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be
downloaded from the Canon website (p.4, 489).
www.canon.com/icpd
ENGLISH
Introduction
The EOS 77D is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a finedetail CMOS sensor with approx. 24.2 effective megapixels, DIGIC 7,
high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF (up to 45 cross-type AF
points), maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 6.0 shots/sec.,
Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting, and
Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.22-24) and “Handling Precautions” (p.25-27). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music on the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)
Strap
Battery Pack
LP-E17
Battery Charger
LC-E17E*
(with protective cover)
* Battery Charger LC-E17E comes with a power cord.
 The camera does not come with the Software CD-ROM, an interface cable
or HDMI cable.
 The Instruction Manuals are listed on the next page.
 If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
 For items sold separately, see the System Map (p.440).
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (p.4).
The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold individually. Note
that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with
the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
Software can be downloaded from the Canon website (p.489) for your use.
3
Instruction Manuals
Quick Reference Guide
The booklet is the Quick Reference Guide.
More detailed Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be
downloaded from the Canon website.
Downloading and Viewing the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
1
Download the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
Instruction Manuals.
Instruction Manuals Available for Download
• Camera Instruction Manual
• Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction
Manual
• Lens Instruction Manuals
• Software Instruction Manuals
2 View the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to
open it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s
Help section.
Software can be downloaded from the Canon website (p.489) for your use.
4
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can also be downloaded using the QR
code.
www.canon.com/icpd
 A software application is required to read out the QR code.
 Select your country or region of residence, then download the Instruction
Manuals.
 The QR code can also be displayed under [54: Manual/software URL].
5
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (p.40).
1
Upon purchase, charge the battery
to start using (p.38).
Insert the card (p.41).
2
3
With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the
card slot.
White index
Red index
Attach the lens (p.51).
Align the lens’s white or red mount
index with the camera’s mount
index of the same color to attach
the lens.
4
Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <f> (p.51).
5
Set the power switch to <1>,
then set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.84).
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the lock release button at the center.
All the necessary camera settings will
be set automatically.
6
Quick Start Guide
6
Flip out the LCD monitor (p.44).
7
Focus on the subject (p.54).
8
Take the picture (p.54).
9
Review the picture.
When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screen, see
page 47.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
The built-in flash will be raised as
necessary.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.121).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.241).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.121).
 To delete images, see “Erasing Images” (p.375).
7
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of
capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized)
by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera
(p.74).
 SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a reading/writing
speed class at least as high as shown in the following table.
Movie Recording Size
(p.287)
ALL-I*
Recording Formats
MOV
MP4
UHS Speed Class 3 or
faster
L: 8 7
IPB
(Standard) Other than
above
-
SD Speed Class 10 or
faster
-
SD Speed Class 6 or
faster
IPB (Light)
-
SD Speed Class 4 or
faster
* Image-recording quality that is automatically set for time-lapse movie shooting
(p.296).
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not be played back
properly.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
8
Chapters
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations
37
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
83
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
123
Image Settings
151
Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects
189
Flash Photography
215
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
241
Shooting Movies
275
Handy Features
323
Image Playback
345
Post-Processing Images
391
Customizing the Camera
399
Reference
419
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
487
9
Contents by Purpose
Shooting
 Shoot automatically
 p.83-120 (Basic Zone modes)
 Shoot continuously
 p.147 (i Continuous shooting)
 Take a picture of yourself in a group  p.149 (j Self-timer)
 Freeze the action
 Blur the action
 p.192 (s Shutter-priority AE)
 Blur the background
 p.90 (C Creative Auto)
 Keep the background in sharp focus p.194 (f Aperture-priority AE)
 Adjust the image brightness (exposure) p.205 (Exposure compensation)
 Shoot in low light
 p.84, 216 (D Flash photography)
p.158 (ISO speed setting)
 Shoot without flash
 p.89 (7 Flash Off)
p.118 (b Flash off)
 Shoot fireworks at night
 p.199 (Bulb exposure)
 Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor  p.241 (A Live View shooting)
 Use Creative filters
 p.111, 251 (Creative filters)
 Shoot movies
 p.275 (k Movie shooting)
Image Quality
 Shoot with image effects matching the subject  p.161 (Picture Style)
 Make a large-size print of the picture  p.152 (73, 83, 1)
10
 Take many pictures
 p.152 (7a, 8a, b)
AF (Focusing)
 Change the AF area selection mode  p.129 (S AF area selection mode)
 Shoot a moving subject
 p.100, 103, 126 (AI Servo AF)
Playback
 View the images on the camera  p.121 (x Playback)
 Search for pictures quickly
 p.346 (H Index display)
p.347 (I Image browsing)
 Rate images
 p.353 (Ratings)
 Prevent important images
from accidental deletion
 p.372 (K Image protect)
 Delete unnecessary images
 p.375 (L Delete)
 Auto play back photos and movies  p.366 (Slide show)
 View the photos and movies on a TV set  p.369 (TV set)
 Adjust the LCD monitor brightness  p.326 (LCD monitor brightness)
 Apply special effect to images  p.392 (Creative filters)
11
Index to Features
Power
Battery
• Charging
• Installing/Removing
• Battery level
• Checking battery
information
Recording Images
 p.38
 p.40
 p.46
 p.421
Creating/Selecting
a folder
 p.327
File numbering
 p.329
AF
AF operation
 p.124
Household power outlet  p.422
AF area selection mode  p.129
Auto power off
AF point selection
 p.131
Lens group
 p.137
Manual focusing
 p.146
 p.45
Cards
Installing/Removing
 p.41
Formatting
 p.74
Releasing shutter
without card
 p.324
Lens
Attaching/Detaching
 p.51
Zoom
 p.52
Drive
Drive mode
 p.147
Continuous shooting
 p.147
Self-timer
 p.149
Maximum burst
 p.154
Image Quality
Image-recording quality  p.152
Basic Settings
Picture Style
 p.161
Dioptric adjustment
 p.53
White balance
 p.169
Language
 p.50
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.175
Date/Time/Zone
 p.47
Beeper
 p.324
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.177
LCD monitor
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
 p.176
 p.179
Using the LCD monitor
 p.44
LCD auto off/on
 p.338
Lens aberration
correction
Brightness adjustment
 p.326
Reducing flicker
 p.185
Touch screen
 p.71
Highlight tone priority
 p.403
Display level settings
 p.59
Color space
 p.187
Feature guide
 p.63
12
Index to Features
Shooting
Movie Shooting
Shooting mode
 p.30
Movie shooting
 p.275
ISO speed
 p.158
AF method
 p.259
Aspect ratio
 p.156
Movie recording size
 p.287
Bulb
 p.199
Movie Servo AF
 p.315
Bulb timer
 p.201
Sound recording
 p.313
Interval timer
 p.211
Manual exposure
 p.280
Metering mode
 p.203
Digital zoom
 p.290
Mirror lockup
 p.209
HDR movie shooting
 p.291
Remote control
 p.423
Creative filters for movies p.292
Multi function lock
 p.57
Video snapshot
 p.303
Time-lapse movie
 p.296
Exposure Adjustment
Remote control shooting  p.318
Exposure compensation  p.205
Exposure compensation
with M+ISO Auto
 p.198
Playback
Image review time
 p.325
AEB
 p.206
Single-image display
 p.121
AE lock
 p.208
Shooting information
 p.385
Index display
 p.346
 p.347
Flash
Built-in flash
 p.216
Image browsing
(Jump display)
External flash
 p.221
Magnified view
 p.349
Flash function settings
 p.223
Image rotation
 p.352
Wireless photography
 p.229
Rating
 p.353
Movie playback
 p.362
Slide show
 p.366
 p.369
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
 p.241
AF operation
 p.256
Viewing images on
a TV set
AF method
 p.259
Protect
 p.372
Creative filters
 p.251
Erasing
 p.375
Touch shutter
 p.269
Touch playback
 p.350
Print Order (DPOF)
 p.378
Photobook Set-up
 p.382
13
Index to Features
Image Editing
Creative filters
 p.392
Resizing
 p.395
Cropping
 p.397
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.400
My Menu
 p.413
Software
Software Start Guide
 p.488
Software Instruction
Manual
 p.490
Wi-Fi Function
 Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication)
Function Instruction Manual
14
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
: Indicates the Main Dial.
<5>
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
<W><X><Y><Z>
: Indicates the direction of the shift or move
when the key on the Quick Control Dial is
pressed.
<0>
: Indicates the Setting button.
0/9/7/8
: Indicates that each function remains active
for approx. 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec.
after you let go of the button.
* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons
and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing
relevant operations and functionality.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
O
: This icon at the upper right of the page titles indicates that
the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes
(p.31).
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions and Sample Photos
All operations described in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set downward (Multi
function lock released) (p.57).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual describe the camera attached with the
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.
The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual
are only for illustrative purposes to show the effects more clearly.
15
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Contents by Purpose ...................................................................... 10
Index to Features ........................................................................... 12
Conventions Used in this Manual................................................... 15
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 22
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 25
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 28
1
Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations
37
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 38
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 40
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 41
Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 44
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 45
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 47
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 50
Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 51
Basic Shooting Operations............................................................. 53
Setting the Screen Display Level ................................................... 59
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 65
3 Menu Operations and Configurations................................... 67
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen ................................. 71
Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 74
Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................ 76
Displaying the Electronic Level ...................................................... 78
Displaying the Grid ......................................................................... 80
Displaying the Flicker Detection ..................................................... 81
16
Contents
2
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
83
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................84
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................87
7 Shooting When You Cannot Use Flash ....................................89
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................90
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 97
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 98
4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................99
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ...................................................... 100
8: Special Scene Mode ...........................................................101
q Shooting Group Photos ...........................................................102
C Photographing Children ...........................................................103
P Shooting Food .......................................................................... 104
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits .................................................105
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ..................................106
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)..........................................107
G Shooting Backlit Scenes.......................................................... 108
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects ....................................... 111
Q Quick Control........................................................................... 117
Adjusting the Brightness ...............................................................120
x Image Playback ......................................................................121
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
123
f: Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF operation) ............... 124
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ....................................... 129
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................. 133
AF Sensor ..................................................................................... 136
Lenses and Usable AF Points.......................................................137
Subjects Difficult to Focus on........................................................145
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................146
i Selecting the Drive Mode........................................................147
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 149
17
Contents
4
Image Settings
151
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ........................................... 152
Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio ............................................. 156
g: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ................................. 158
A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 161
A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 164
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 167
B: Matching the Light Source (White balance) ......................... 169
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source......................... 173
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer) ... 175
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 176
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics..... 179
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 185
Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color space) .................. 187
5
Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects
189
d: Program AE ............................................................................ 190
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement (Shutter priority AE)..... 192
f: Changing the Depth of Field (Aperture priority AE).............. 194
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 196
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 197
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures ..................................................... 199
q Changing the Metering Mode ................................................. 203
Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation ................................ 205
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ................................................. 206
A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 208
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Vibration Blur.......................... 209
p Interval Timer Shooting .....................................................211
6
Flash Photography
215
D Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 216
D Using an External Speedlite ..................................................... 221
Setting the Flash Function............................................................ 223
18
Contents
Wireless Flash Photography ......................................................... 229
Easy Wireless Flash Photography ................................................232
Custom Wireless Flash Photography............................................ 235
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 241
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 242
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................249
U Shooting with Creative Filter Effects ....................................... 251
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 255
Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF operation)....................... 256
Focusing with AF (AF method) ..................................................... 259
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter .............................................269
MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 271
8
Shooting Movies
275
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................276
Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................276
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................280
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................286
Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................287
Using Movie Digital Zoom ............................................................. 290
u Shooting HDR Movies ............................................................. 291
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filter Effects ...........................292
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies.................................................296
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 303
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 313
9
Handy Features
323
Handy Features ............................................................................324
Disabling the Beeper ..................................................................324
Card Reminder ........................................................................... 324
Setting the Image Review Time .................................................325
Setting the Auto Power Off Time ................................................325
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 326
19
Contents
Creating and Selecting a Folder ................................................ 327
File Numbering Methods............................................................ 329
Setting the Copyright Information .............................................. 332
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ............................................... 334
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ........................... 335
Disabling the Auto Turn Off of the LCD Monitor ........................ 338
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning .................................................. 339
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 341
Manual Sensor Cleaning .............................................................. 343
10
Image Playback
345
x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 346
u/y Magnifying Images ............................................................. 349
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 350
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 352
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 353
Setting Image Search Conditions ................................................. 356
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 358
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 360
k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 362
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 364
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 366
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 369
K Protecting Images................................................................... 372
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 375
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 378
p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 382
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 385
20
Contents
11
Post-Processing Images
391
U Applying Creative Filter Effects ............................................... 392
S Resizing JPEG Images ...........................................................395
N Cropping JPEG Images...........................................................397
12
Customizing the Camera
399
Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 400
Custom Function Setting Items..................................................... 402
C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................ 402
C.Fn II: Image ............................................................................403
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive ............................................................ 404
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others.......................................................... 407
Custom Controls ........................................................................... 409
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 413
13
Reference
419
B Button Functions ................................................................. 420
Checking the Battery Information.................................................. 421
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 422
Remote Control Shooting..............................................................423
H Using Eye-Fi Cards ................................................................. 428
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode...............................430
System Map .................................................................................. 440
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 442
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................452
Error Codes...................................................................................467
Specifications ................................................................................468
14
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
487
Software Start Guide .....................................................................488
Downloading and Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF Files) ...490
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................491
Index ............................................................................................. 493
21
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the
product if it is damaged.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharge time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire, electrical
shock or burns if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your
eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing
it. See a physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
22
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery, and
disconnect the power plug and connecting cables from the equipment before storing.
This is to prevent electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery
away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent shortcircuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire,
burns, or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth when using it. Doing so may trap heat
within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,
electrical shock, and burns.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
23
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car
under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may
also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or
shorten the life of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the
camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
24
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a clean, well-wrung wet
cloth.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
 Do not block the built-in flash or mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing
so may cause a malfunction.
 Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres
to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use
cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For
stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
malfunction.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
25
Handling Precautions
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
 If you repeat continuous shooting or perform Live View shooting or movie
shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a
malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels
may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures, or
look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
26
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the
camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are
visible on the images, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens
with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
27
Nomenclature
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam emitter
(p.216/127)
EF lens mount index (p.51)
Flash sync contacts
<V> Focal plane mark (p.99)
Hot shoe (p.221)
LCD panel (p.33)
EF-S lens mount index
(p.51)
<B> AF area selection
button (p.130)
<D> Flash button
(p.216)
<g> ISO speed
setting button (p.158)
Mode Dial lock-release
button (p.55)
<6> Main Dial
(p.55)
Mode Dial (p.30)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
(p.58)
Strap
mount
(p.37)
Shutter button
(p.54)
Speaker
(p.362)
Red-eye
reduction/
Self-timer
lamp
(p.217/149)
Built-in
microphones
(p.276)
Remote
control sensor
(p.209, 426)
Grip
Terminal cover
Mirror (p.209, 343)
p (N-Mark)*
Contacts (p.27)
Lens release button
(p.52)
Lens mount
Lens lock pin
Depth-of-field preview
button (p.196)
<I> Digital terminal (p.491)
Body cap (p.51)
<F> Remote control terminal (p.427)
<Y> External microphone
IN terminal (p.313)
* Used for Wi-Fi connections
via the NFC function.
28
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.369)
Nomenclature
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.53)
<A> Live View shooting/Movie
shooting button (p.242/276)
Display-off sensor
(p.76, 338)
<Q> Quick Control button (p.65)
<p> AF start button
(p.54, 124, 244, 285)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Eyecup (p.427)
<A/I> AE lock/FE lock
button/Index/Reduce button
(p.208/219/346, 349)
<B> Info button
(p.76, 121, 245, 282, 420)
<S/u> AF point
selection/Magnify
button (p.131/349)
Power switch
(p.45)
<M> Menu
button (p.67)
<k> Wi-Fi
button
LCD monitor/
Touch screen
(p.67, 325/71,
350, 364)
Access lamp
(p.42)
Card slot cover
(p.41)
DC cord hole
(p.422)
Serial number
Battery compartment
cover release lever
(p.40)
Battery compartment
cover (p.40)
Tripod socket
<x> Playback button (p.121)
Multi function lock switch
(p.57)
<L> Erase button (p.375)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.56)
<WB> White balance selection button (p.169)
<XA> Picture Style selection button (p.161)
<YQi> Drive mode selection button (p.147, 149)
<Zf> AF operation selection button (p.124)
<0> Setting button (p.67)
Card slot (p.41)
29
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to
suit the subject or scene for shooting.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto
(p.84)
7 : Flash Off (p.89)
C : Creative Auto (p.90)
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
Portrait (p.97)
Landscape (p.98)
Close-up (p.99)
Sports (p.100)
8: Special scene (p.101)
q Group Photo (p.102)
C Kids (p.103)
P
Food (p.104)
6 Night Portrait (p.106)
F Handheld Night Scene (p.107)
G HDR Backlight Control (p.108)
x Candlelight (p.105)
v : Creative filters (p.111)
30
G Grainy B/W (p.113)
c Miniature effect (p.114)
W Soft focus (p.113)
A HDR art standard (p.114)
X Fish-eye effect (p.113)
B HDR art vivid (p.114)
Z Water painting effect (p.114)
C HDR art bold (p.115)
H Toy camera effect (p.114)
D HDR art embossed (p.115)
Nomenclature
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for shooting
various subjects as desired.
d
s
f
a
: Program AE (p.190)
: Shutter-priority AE (p.192)
: Aperture-priority AE (p.194)
: Manual exposure (p.197)
31
Nomenclature
Quick Control Screen
(Example in the <d> mode with [s: Shooting screen: Standard] set (p.65))
Shutter speed
Multi function lock warning (LOCK)
(p.57)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
(p.205)
AEB range (p.206)
Multi function lock
warning (LOCK)
(p.57)
Aperture
Multi function lock warning (LOCK)
(p.57)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175)
ISO speed (p.158)
Highlight tone priority
(p.403)
Flash exposure
compensation
(p.218, 239)
Shooting mode
Picture Style (p.161)
Built-in flash settings
AF operation (p.124)
Manual focus
(p.146, 271)
Image-recording quality
(p.152)
73 Large/Fine
83 Large/Normal
74 Medium/Fine
84 Medium/Normal
7a Small 1/Fine
8a Small 1/Normal
b Small 2 (Fine)
1+73
RAW+Large/
Fine
1 RAW
Quick Control icon
(p.66)
Battery level (p.46)
AF area selection mode (p.129)
Wi-Fi function
White balance (p.169)
Wi-Fi signal strength
Eye-Fi transmission status (p.428)
Possible shots
Metering mode (p.203)
Possible shots during
white balance bracketing
GPS connection indicator
Self-timer countdown
Drive mode (p.147, 149)
Bluetooth function
Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.176)
u White balance correction (p.173)
B White balance bracketing (p.174)
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
32
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
ISO speed (p.158)
<g> ISO speed indicator
(p.158)
<p>
Interval timer shooting (p.211)
Bulb timer shooting (p.201)
Time-lapse movie shooting (p.296)
Battery level (p.46)
<A> Highlight tone priority
(p.403)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Possible shots during white
balance bracketing
Card error warning (Err)
Error number
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
(p.205)
AEB range (p.206)
Shutter speed
Bulb exposure (buLb)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recharging (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Card error (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Wi-Fi function
Bluetooth function
Aperture
AF point selection
(MAF, SEL N, SEL AF)
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
33
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Spot metering circle (p.203)
Focusing screen
Large Zone AF frame (p.129)
AF point (p.129)
Grid (p.80)
Area AF frame
(p.129)
Aspect ratio
line (p.156)
Flicker detection
(p.81, 185)
Electronic level
(p.79)
<i> Warning
icon (p.407)
<g> ISO
speed indicator
(p.158)
<o> Focus indicator
<A> AE lock (p.208)
AEB in-progress
(p.206)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.216, 221)
Improper FE lock
warning
<e> High-speed sync
(p.227)
<d> FE lock (p.219) /
FEB in-progress
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.218)
Shutter speed (p.192)
Bulb exposure (buLb)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recharging (D buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Card error (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
Maximum burst
ISO speed (p.158)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.403)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.205)
AEB range (p.206)
Red-eye reduction lamp ON
<O> Exposure compensation (p.205)
AF point selection
(MAF, SEL N, SEL AF)
Aperture (p.194)
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
34
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E17E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (p.38).
Battery pack slot
Power cord
Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp
Power cord socket
35
36
1
Getting Started and
Basic Camera Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you
start shooting and the basic camera operations.
Attaching the Provided Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
 The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.427).
Eyepiece cover
37
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E17E
the battery.
3 Recharge
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp lights up in orange.
 When the battery is fully recharged,
the full-charge lamp will light up in
green.
 It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
38
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current will keep released, resulting in excess
discharge and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the
protective cover (provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is
fully charged may lower the battery performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may
damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having
been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its
service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.421) and purchase a
new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 5 sec.
 Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E17.
 Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with
an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
39
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera. The
camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed,
and darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery is not
installed, the image in the viewfinder becomes blurred and you
cannot perform focusing.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting, be sure to
attach the provided protective cover
(p.38) to the battery.
After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to forcefully
swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
40
Installing and Removing the Card
You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately)
with the camera. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also
be used. The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Installing the Card
1
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Possible shots
41
Installing and Removing the Card
 The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining
capacity of the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from shooting without a card, forgetting to install it (p.324).
Removing the Card
1
Access lamp
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Check that the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
 Gently push in the card, then let it go
to eject.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
42
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately, p.422) are used).
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.329).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the
images and then format the card with the camera (p.74). The card may
then return to normal.
 Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do
not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
43
Using the LCD Monitor
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, or play back photos and movies. You can
change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.
1
Flip out the LCD monitor.
the LCD monitor.
2 Rotate
 When the LCD monitor is swung out,
180°
90°
175°
you can rotate it up, down, or over
180° to face the subject.
 The indicated angle is only
approximate.
it toward you.
3 Face
 Normally, use the camera with the
LCD monitor facing you.
 Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD
monitor.
 When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle
range of the flipped out LCD monitor will be limited.
 When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen
facing inward. You can protect the screen.
 During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen (right/left
reversed).
44
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 47 to set the date/time/zone.
<k> : The camera turns on. You can
shoot movies (p.276).
<1> : The camera turns on. You can
shoot still photos.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not function. Set the
power switch to this position
when not using the camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be performed automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display
<f>.
 Even during the sensor cleaning, if you press the shutter button
halfway (p.54), cleaning operation will be stopped, and you can take
a picture immediately.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
To save battery power, if the camera is not operated for a prolonged
period, the power will turn off automatically after the time set under [52:
Auto power off] (p.325). To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway (p.54).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
45
Turning on the Power
V Battery Level Indicator
When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of
the four levels.
V
b
v
m
: Battery level is sufficient.
: Battery level is low, but the
camera can still be used.
: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
: Recharge the battery.
Number of Possible Shots with Viewfinder Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 820 shots
Approx. 770 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 600 shots
Approx. 550 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Using the Wi-Fi function.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses
may exhaust the battery faster than others.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 243.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery condition (p.421).
46
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Date/Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Time zone], then press <0>.
 For the menu function setting procedures, see pages 67-70.
 In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference
compared to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
47
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
 Press <0> again.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the time zone, then press <0>.
 If your desired time zone is not listed,
press the <M> button, then
proceed to the next step to set it (with
the time difference from the
Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).
 To set the time difference from UTC,
press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
parameter (+/-/hour/minute) for [Time
difference].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 After entering the time zone or time
difference, press the <Y> <Z> keys
to select [OK], then press <0>.
the date and time.
4 Set
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the number.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)
48
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Z], then press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[OK], then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
The date/time/zone settings may be reset in the following cases. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
• When the camera is stored without the battery.
• When the camera’s battery becomes exhausted.
• When the camera is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a
prolonged period.
 The set time and date will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [4 min.] or less, the auto power off
time will be approx. 6 min. when the [52: Date/Time/Zone] setting
screen is displayed.
 After changing the time zone or time difference setting, check that the
correct date and time are set.
49
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the [LanguageK], then press
<0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
50
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. Note
that you cannot use the EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the lens’s red or white index
White index
with the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
Red index
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
 <AF> stands for autofocus.
 <MF> stands for manual focus.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
51
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Zooming
Turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
 If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown
by the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch
to <2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
 During viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting, if you use a TS-E lens
(except the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II) and shift or tilt the
lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure may not be
obtained or the exposure may be irregular.
Angle of View
Since the image area is smaller
than the 35mm film format, the
effective angle of view of an
attached lens will be equivalent
to that of a lens with approx. 1.6x
of the focal length indicated.
52
Image area (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm /
0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm film format
(36 x 24 mm /
1.42 x 0.94 in.)
Basic Shooting Operations
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.427).
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 241.
53
Basic Shooting Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel (0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 In Creative Zone modes, pressing the <p> button is the same as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway
first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it
completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes
the picture.
 Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
immediately go back to shooting-ready state by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
54
Basic Shooting Operations
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
After pressing a button such as <g>
<WB> <XA> <YQi> <Zf>,
turn the <6> dial to change the setting.
For the <g> button, the function
remains selected for approx. 6 sec. (9)
after pressing the button.
When the timer ends or if you press the
shutter button halfway, the camera will
go back to shooting-ready state.
 Use this dial to select or set the ISO
speed, white balance, Picture Style,
drive mode, AF operation, AF point,
etc.
(2) Turn only the <6> dial.
While looking at the viewfinder display or
LCD panel, turn the <6> dial to
change the setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) can be performed even when the <R> switch is
set upward (Multi function lock, p.57).
55
Basic Shooting Operations
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
After pressing a button such as <g>
<WB> <XA> <YQi> <Zf>,
turn the <5> dial to change the setting.
For the <g> button, the function
remains selected for approx. 6 sec. (9)
after pressing the button.
When the timer ends or if you press the
shutter button halfway, the camera will
go back to shooting-ready state.
 Use this dial to select or set the ISO
speed, white balance, Picture Style,
drive mode, AF operation, AF point,
etc.
(2) Turn only the <5> dial.
While looking at the viewfinder display or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial to change
the setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
(3) After pressing a button, press the
<W>, <X>, <Y>, or <Z> key.
After pressing the <M> or <Q>
button, press the <W> <X> or <Y>
<Z> keys to set menus or Quick Control
functions.
The operations in (1) and (3) can be performed even when the <R>
switch is set upward (Multi function lock, p.57).
56
Basic Shooting Operations
R Multi Function Lock
With [54: Multi function lock] set and the <R> switch set
upward, you can prevent the settings from being changed by
accidentally operating Main Dial or Quick Control Dial or by
inadvertently tapping on the touch screen.
<R> switch set downward:
Lock released
<R> switch set upward:
Lock engaged
1
Select [Multi function lock].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Multi
function lock], then press <0>.
a checkmark [X] to the
2 Add
camera control to be locked.
 Select a camera control and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X].
 Select [OK].
 The selected camera controls will be
locked when the multi function lock
switch is set in the locked position.
 If the <R> switch is set upward and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. On the Quick Control screen (p.58), [LOCK] will be displayed.
During Live View shooting, [LOCK] will be displayed on the LCD monitor.
 By default, the <5> dial will be locked when the multi function lock
switch is in the locked position.
 In Basic Zone modes, only [hTouch control] is settable.
57
Basic Shooting Operations
U LCD Panel Illumination
You can illuminate the LCD panel by
pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9)
or off the LCD panel illumination by
pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
Displaying the Quick Control Screen
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the Quick
Control screen will appear. You can then check the current shooting
function settings.
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.65).
Press the <B> button again to turn off the display.
58
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
You can set how information is displayed on the screen according to
your preference. Change the settings as necessary.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [s] tab.
2 Select
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[s] tab.
Shooting Screen
You can select [Standard] or [Guided] (friendly display) for the Quick
Control screen in viewfinder shooting. By default, it is set to [Standard].
1
Select [Shooting screen].
2 Select the display method.
59
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
 Sample Screens
<C>: Standard
<C>: Guided
<f>: Standard
<f>: Guided
In Creative Zone modes, when [Guided] is set, only the functions particular
to the set shooting mode are displayed on the Quick Control screen. Note
that items that cannot be set from the Quick Control screen when [Guided]
is selected can be set via the menu screen (p.68).
60
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
Menu Display
You can select the display method from [Standard] or [Guided]. If you
set [Guided], main tab descriptions are provided when you press the
<M> button. If you set [Standard], you proceed directly to the
menu screen when you press the <M> button. By default, it is set to
[Standard].
1
Select [Menu display].
2 Select the display method.
Main tabs
When [Guided] is set, the [9 (My Menu)] tab does not appear. To set My
Menu (p.413), change the menu display level to [Standard].
61
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
Shooting Mode Guide
You can display the description of the shooting mode (mode guide)
when switching the shooting mode during viewfinder shooting. By
default, it is set to [Enable].
1
Select [Mode guide].
2 Select [Enable].
the Mode Dial.
3 Turn
 A description of the selected shooting
mode will appear.
the <X> key.
4 Press
 The rest of the description will
appear.
 When you press <0>, the
description will disappear and the
Quick Control screen will appear.
 In the <8> and <v> shooting
modes, the shooting mode selection
screen will appear.
In step 3 and step 4, if you tap on [OK] or press the shutter button halfway,
the description will disappear and the Quick Control screen will appear.
62
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
Feature Guide
When using Quick Control or setting menu items, you can display a
brief description of functions and options (feature guide). By default, it is
set to [Enable].
1
Select [Feature guide].
2 Select [Enable].
 Sample Screens
Quick Control screen
Menu screen
Feature guide
The description will disappear when you tap on it or proceed with the
operation.
63
3 Setting the Screen Display Level
Shooting Tips
Shooting tips appear when [Shooting screen] is set to [Guided] (p.59)
and the camera setting is in any of the following cases. In Basic Zone
modes, shooting tips appear regardless of the [Shooting screen]
setting.
• To further blur the background (with the lowest aperture value set in
the <f> mode).
• The image is likely to be overexposed.
• The image is likely to be underexposed.
• Camera shake is likely to occur (only in Basic Zone modes).
1
Tap on the area within the frame.
 The shooting tips will appear.
 You can also display the shooting tips
by pressing the <L> button.
the shooting tips.
2 Check
 You can scroll up and down by
tapping on the screen.
 You can also scroll by pressing the
<W> <X> keys.
on [2].
3 Tap
 Shooting tips will disappear, and the
screen in step 1 will reappear.
 You can also hide the shooting tips by
pressing <0>.
64
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor with intuitive operations. This is called Quick Control.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.63) will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
 For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting
procedures, see page 117.
 In steps 1 and 2, you can also tap on the LCD monitor to perform the
operation (p.71).
65
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Sample Quick Control Screen
 When [s: Shooting screen: Standard] is Set
Aperture (p.194)
Shutter speed (p.192)
Shooting mode* (p.30)
Highlight tone priority* (p.403)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.205/206)
ISO speed (p.158)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.218)
Picture Style (p.161)
Built-in flash settings
(p.226)
AF operation (p.124)
Image-recording quality
(p.152)
Return
White balance (p.169)
AF area selection mode (p.130)
White balance correction (p.173)
Metering mode (p.203)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175)
Drive mode (p.147)
White balance bracketing (p.174)
* These functions cannot be set with Quick Control.
 When [s: Shooting screen: Guided] is Set
Exposure
compensation
(p.205)
Aperture (p.194)
AF operation (p.124)
Return
Drive mode (p.147)
66
AF area selection mode (p.130)
3 Menu Operations and Configurations
You can configure various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date/time, etc.
<M> button
<0> button
Quick Control Dial
<W><X><Y><Z>
keys
LCD monitor
Menu Screen
The menu tabs and items displayed vary depending on the shooting
mode.
Basic Zone modes
Movie shooting
Creative Zone modes
3: Playback
5: Set-up
s: Display level
z: Shooting
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Secondary
tabs
Menu items
Menu settings
67
3 Menu Operations and Configurations
Menu Setting Procedure
 When [s: Menu display: Standard] is Set
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab (group of functions) will
switch.
 Press the Quick Control Dial’s <Y>
<Z> keys to select a secondary tab.
 For example, in this manual, the
[z3] tab refers to the screen
displayed when the z (Shooting)
tab’s [3] is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Press the Quick Control Dial’s <W>
<X> keys to select the item, then
press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
 Press the Quick Control Dial’s <W>
<X> or <Y> <Z> keys to select the
desired setting. (Some settings are
selected with the <W> and <X> keys,
and others are selected with the <Y>
and <Z> keys.)
 The current setting is indicated in blue.
the setting.
5 Set
 Press <0> to set it.
 If you change the setting from the
default, it will be indicated in blue
(available only for the menu items
under the [z] tab).
68
3 Menu Operations and Configurations
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready
state.
 In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step
4, you can also turn the <5> dial to select certain settings.
 In steps 2 to 6, you can also tap on the LCD monitor to perform the
operation (p.71).
 The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 442.
 When [s: Menu display: Guided] is Set
Main tabs
1
Display the main tabs.
 When you press the <M> button,
the main tabs and a description of the
selected tab will appear.
a main tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the Quick
Control Dial’s <Y> <Z> keys, the
main tab (group of functions) will
switch.
the menu screen.
3 Display
 Press <0> to display the menu
screen.
 To return to the main tab screen,
press the <M> button.
 In step 2, you can also use the <6> dial or the <Q> button.
 You can also go to the menu screen by tapping on [OK] in step 3.
69
3 Menu Operations and Configurations
a secondary tab.
4 Select
 Press the Quick Control Dial’s <Y>
<Z> keys to select a secondary tab.
 For example, in this manual, the
[z3] tab refers to the screen
displayed when the z (Shooting)
tab’s [3] is selected.
 The subsequent operations are the
same as those for [s: Menu
display: Standard]. See the steps on
page 68, starting with step 3.
 To exit the setting, press the <M>
button twice.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction] is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
With [Clear all camera settings] under [54: Clear settings], you can reset
the menu functions to the default settings (p.335).
70
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
You can operate the camera by tapping on the LCD monitor (touchsensitive panel) with your fingers.
Tap
Sample Screen (Quick Control)
 Use your finger to tap on (touch
briefly and then remove your finger
from) the LCD monitor.
 By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [Q], you can return to
the preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping on the screen
 Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button
 Quick Control
 Setting functions after pressing the <B>, <g>, <S>, <WB>,
<XA>, <YQi>, or <Zf> button
 Touch AF and touch shutter in Live View shooting
 AF point selection in movie shooting
 Setting functions in Live View shooting and movie shooting
 Playback operations
If [53: Beep] is set to [Touch n], the beep will not sound for touch
operations (p.324).
71
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
Drag
Sample Screen (Menu screen)
 Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Sample Screen (Scale display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
 Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
 Setting with scale display
 Quick Control
 Selecting AF points
 Setting functions in Live View shooting and movie shooting
 Playback operations
72
d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen
3 Setting the Touch Control Response
1
Select [Touch control].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
the touch control response
2 Set
setting.
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 [Standard] is the normal setting.
 [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch screen response than
[Standard]. Try using both settings
and select the one you prefer.
 To disable touch operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
 Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
 Do not use wet fingers for touch operations.
 If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or malfunction may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
 Attaching any commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the
LCD monitor may degrade the touch operation response.
 If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be slower.
73
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to
a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Format
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The card will be formatted.
 When the formatting is complete, the
menu will reappear.
 For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to add a checkmark <X>
to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
74
3 Formatting the Card
Execute [Format card] in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.467).
Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will complete and you can use the card as usual.
 Card’s file formats
SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
When shooting a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie
will be recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple
files) even if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
 If you format an SDXC card with this camera and then insert it into
another camera, an error may be displayed and the card may become
unusable. Certain computer operating systems or card readers may not
recognize a card formatted in exFAT.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, perform low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be
installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
75
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
The LCD monitor can display the Quick Control screen, menu screen,
captured images, etc.
 When you turn on the power, the
Quick Control screen will appear. You
can then check the current shooting
function settings.
 When your eye is near the viewfinder,
the display-off sensor (p.29, 338) will
turn off the LCD monitor to prevent
glare. When your eye leaves the
viewfinder, the LCD monitor will turn
on again.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can switch the LCD monitor screen
as follows: Display the electronic
level, display the Quick Control
screen, and turn off the LCD monitor
screen (p.420).
Menu Functions
 Appears when you press the
<M> button. Press the
button again to return to the
previous screen.
76
Captured Image
 Appears when you press the
<x> button. Press the button
again to return to the previous
screen.
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
 Under [52: LCD auto off], you can prevent the LCD monitor from
turning off automatically (p.338).
 Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing
the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.
 If you look through the viewfinder eyepiece while wearing sunglasses,
the LCD monitor may not turn off automatically. If this occurs, press the
<B> button to turn off the LCD monitor.
 Nearby fluorescent lighting may cause the LCD monitor to turn off. If this
occurs, take the camera away from the fluorescent lighting.
77
3 Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt. Note that you can check
only the horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.420).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°
Horizontal level
increments. The tilt scale is marked in
5° increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
 Even when the tilt is almost corrected, there may be a margin of error of
approx. ±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display
the electronic level as described above (except with u+Tracking).
78
3 Displaying the Electronic Level
Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
A simple electronic level using a camera icon can be displayed in the
viewfinder. Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can
take the picture while checking the camera tilt.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Electronic level].
3 Select [Show].
the shutter button halfway.
4 Press
 The electronic level will appear at the
position shown in the illustration.
Horizontal
Tilt 1°
Electronic level
Tilt 2° or higher
 This level also works with vertical
shooting.
Even when the tilt is almost corrected, there may be a margin of error of
approx. ±1°.
79
3 Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Grid display].
[Show].
3 Select
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.255, 317).
80
3 Displaying the Flicker DetectionN
If you set this function, <G> will appear in the viewfinder when
the camera detects flicker caused by the blinking of the light source. By
default, flicker detection is set to [Show].
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Flicker detection].
3 Select [Show].
If you set [z5: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with
reduced unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker (p.185).
81
82
2
Basic Shooting and
Image Playback
This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone
modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to
play back images.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.118, 430). Also,
because advanced shooting function settings cannot be
changed, you can enjoy shooting photographs without
worrying about botched pictures due to misoperation.
Ba
sic Z
one
Before Shooting in the <8> or <v> Mode
When the LCD monitor is turned off, press the <Q> button or
<B> button (p.101, 111, 420) to check which shooting mode is
set before shooting.
* <8> : Special scene
* <v> : Creative filters
83
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the
motion of the subject (p.87).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 When achieving focus, the AF point
that has achieved focus will be
displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
 If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Focus indicator
If a description of the shooting mode appears in step 1, press <0> to hide
it (p.62).
84
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
 When you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (p.161).
FAQ
 The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
• Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.54).
• If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again.
• Change the AF area selection mode and shoot again (p.129). The
default setting is Automatic selection AF.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low light
or with a dark subject.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
85
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take
sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.87) will not work in this case.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch of the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
 The flash fired even if it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control
to set [Built-in flash firing] to [b] (p.117) or set the <7> (Flash
Off) mode and shoot (p.89).
 The built-in flash fired and the picture came out extremely
bright.
Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting with
flash, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture may come
out extremely bright (overexposure).
 In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AFassist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet. The
built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is
normal and not a malfunction.
 When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.
86
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to
include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <5>
<8: C>).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
during or after focusing, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as
you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while pressing
the shutter button halfway, focusing will be continuous. At the decisive
moment, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
87
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 241.
1
Display the Live View image on
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <A> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <A> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor for different angles (p.44).
Normal angle
88
Low angle
High angle
7 Shooting When You Cannot Use Flash
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as
in a museum or an aquarium, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode.
Shooting Tips
 Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in
the viewfinder blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even with handheld shooting.
 Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in
the subject being blurred in the picture.
89
C Creative Auto Shooting
In the <C> mode, you can set the following functions for shooting:
(1) Ambience-based shots, (2) Background blur, (3) Drive mode, and
(4) Built-in flash firing. The default settings are the same as the <A>
mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.63) will appear.
 For the setting procedure and details
on each function, see pages 91-96.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
90
C Creative Auto Shooting
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Battery level
Possible shots
Image-recording quality
If you set (1) or (2) when the camera is set for Live View shooting, you
can see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.
(1) Ambience-based shots
You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in
your images. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the ambience.
You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see
page 94.
91
C Creative Auto Shooting
(2) Background blur
• If [OFF] is set, the degree of background blur will change
depending on the brightness.
• If it is set to any setting other than [OFF], you can adjust the
background blur regardless of the brightness.
• If you turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the right,
the background will look sharper.
• Turning the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the left will
blur the subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’s
maximum aperture (smallest f/number), certain slider adjustments
may not be selectable (indicated by •).
• When operating the <6> or <5> dial during Live View shooting,
[Simulating blur] will be displayed on the LCD monitor. You can
see the degree of front and background blur in contrast with the
subject that is focused on during setting operation (while
[Simulating blur] is being displayed).
• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on
page 97.
• Depending on the lens used and shooting conditions, the
background may not look so blurred.
• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If <a> has been set
and you set background blur, <b> will be set automatically.
If [Simulating blur] is enabled during Live View shooting, the image
displayed with <g> (p.245) blinking may have more noise than the actual
image being recorded, or it may look dark.
92
C Creative Auto Shooting
(3) Drive mode: Use the <6> or <5> dial to make the selection. You
can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<u> Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<o> High-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will
be taken continuously. You can shoot up to approx. 6.0 shots
per second.
<i> Low-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will
be taken continuously. You can shoot up to approx. 3.0 shots
per second.
<Q> Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button. A remote controller can also be used.
<l> Self-timer: 2 sec.:
The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the shutter
button.
<q> Self-timer: Continuous:
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the number of multiple shots
(2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you
press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will
be taken.
(4) Built-in flash firing: Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the
desired setting. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<a> Auto built-in flash: The flash fires automatically as
necessary.
<D> Built-in flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b> Built-in flash off : The flash is disabled.
 When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 149.
 When using <b>, see “Shooting When You Cannot Use Flash” on page
89.
93
C Creative Auto Shooting
Shooting with Ambience Selection
Ambience
Ambience Effect
1 Ambience: Standard No setting
2 Vivid
Low / Standard / Strong
3 Soft
Low / Standard / Strong
4 Warm
Low / Standard / Strong
5 Intense
Low / Standard / Strong
6 Cool
Low / Standard / Strong
7 Brighter
Low / Medium / High
8 Darker
Low / Medium / High
9 Monochrome
Blue / B/W / Sepia
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image.
Quick Control, select the
2 With
desired ambience.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[1 Ambience: Standard].
[Ambience-based shots] will appear
on the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired ambience.
 The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
94
C Creative Auto Shooting
the ambience effect.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the effect so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom of the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired effect.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [1
Ambience: Standard].
 The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the captured image.
 The ambience effect may be reduced in flash photography.
 In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may
not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as with the actual
captured image. Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4, and look at the Live
View image, preventing the outside light from affecting the image
viewing.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting this
function, start the operation from step 2.
95
C Creative Auto Shooting
Ambience Settings
1Ambience: Standard
This provides standard image characteristics.
2 Vivid
The subject looks crisp, sharp and vivid. Effective to make the
picture look more impressive than with [1 Ambience: Standard].
3 Soft
The subject is less defined, giving the picture a softer and daintier
look. Good for portraits, pets, flowers, etc.
4 Warm
The subject is less defined with a warmer color cast, giving the
picture a warmer and gentler look. Good for portraits, pets, and other
subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
5 Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling in the picture. Effective to
make the human or living subject stand out more.
6 Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast in
the picture. Effective to make a subject in the shade look more calm
and impressive.
7 Brighter
The picture looks brighter.
8 Darker
The picture looks darker.
9 Monochrome
The picture becomes monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be blue, black and white, or sepia.
96
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
 Select the location where the distance between the subject and
the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better against an uncluttered dark background.
 Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
 Focus on the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of
the face, focus on the eyes.
The default setting is <i> (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you keep
holding down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously (max. approx.
3.0 shots/sec.) to capture changes in the subject’s facial expression and
pose.
97
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
 With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make
the objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.
 Shooting night scenes.
The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables
the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.
 The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
98
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
 Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
 Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <0.39m/1.3ft> on them. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on
the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the
subject, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
If the built-in flash is fired and the bottom part of the picture comes
out unnaturally dark, move away a little from the subject and try
again.
 With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
99
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a
running person or a moving vehicle.
Shooting Tips
 Use a telephoto lens.
Use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a
distance.
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF
frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting*). At
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. If you keep holding down the shutter button, you can shoot
continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in
the subject’s movement.
* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 6.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.
approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
 The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
 Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera
steady and shoot.
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
100
8: Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when
you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
a shooting mode.
3 Select
 Select [Choose scene], then press
<0>.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired shooting mode, then
press <0>.
 You can also select by turning the
<6> or <5> dial.
If [s: Mode guide] is set to [Enable], press <0> after step 1 to go to the
shooting mode selection screen.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Shooting Mode
Page
q Group Photo
p.102
C Kids
P Food
x Candlelight
p.105
Shooting Mode
Page
6 Night Portrait
p.106
p.103
F Handheld Night Scene
p.107
p.104
G HDR Backlight Control
p.108
101
q Shooting Group Photos
Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take
a picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are
all in focus.
Shooting Tips
 Use a wide-angle lens.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to
get all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to
the back. Also, if you place a little distance between the camera and
the subjects (so that the subjects’ entire bodies are in the shot), the
focus range increases.
 Use continuous shooting.
It is recommended to use continuous shooting to shoot multiple
photos in case some people close their eyes.
See the cautions on page 109.
 When shooting indoors or in low-light, hold the camera steady or use a
tripod to prevent camera shake.
 You can adjust the image brightness with [Brightness].
102
C Photographing Children
When you want to continuously focus on and photograph children
running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.
Shooting Tips
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF
frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
 Shoot continuously.
The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting*). At
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. If you keep holding down the shutter button, you can shoot
continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in
the subject’s facial expression and movement.
* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 6.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.
approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
 While the flash is recharging, “buSY” is displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and a picture cannot be taken. Take the picture after
this display turns off.
 See the cautions on page 109.
103
P Shooting Food
When shooting food, use <P> (Food). The photo will look bright and
appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge will be
suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge,
set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
 Avoid using flash.
If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results
in unnatural shadows. Therefore, <b> (Built-in flash off) is set by
default. Try to prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light
locations.
 Since this mode lets you shoot the food in appetizing color tones, human
subjects may be photographed with an unsuitable skin tone.
 The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be reduced.
 If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the standard.
104
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits
When photographing a human subject lit in candlelight, use <x>
(Candlelight). The atmosphere of candlelight is reflected in the color
tones of the picture.
Shooting Tips
 Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then
shoot.
 Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in
the viewfinder blinks.
Under low light where camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, you can reduce blur
caused by camera shake by setting the lens to the wide-angle end,
even with handheld shooting.
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish
tinge, set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
 Live View shooting is not possible.
 Flash photography is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may
be emitted (p.127).
105
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene
in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Shooting Tips
 Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with
handheld shooting, use a tripod.
 Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject.
Note that it is recommended to play back the captured image on
location to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark,
move nearer and shoot again.
 Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
 Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
 If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
 See the cautions on page 109.
106
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.
However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot
night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting
mode, four shots are taken consecutively for each picture, and the
resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
 For shots including people, fire the flash.
If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the <Q>
button to set <D> (Built-in flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first
shot will use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four
consecutive shots are taken.
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 See the cautions on pages 109-110.
107
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
clipped shadows caused by backlighting.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 Flash photography is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may
be emitted (p.127).
 See the cautions on page 110.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
108
Cautions for <q> Group Photo
 Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image
periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)
Also, during Live View shooting, the angle of view changes slightly.
Cautions for <C> Kids
 During Live View shooting, if flash is fired in continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease. Even if the flash is not fired for
subsequent shots, shooting will still be performed with the decreased
continuous shooting speed.
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait and <F> Handheld Night Scene
 During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult with point
sources of light, such as may be found in a night scene. In such a case,
set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
 The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the
actual captured image.
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait
 During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult when the
face of the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <MF> and focus manually.
109
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene and <G> HDR Backlight
Control
 You cannot select 1+73 or 1. If 1+73 or 1 is set, the image
will be recorded in 73 quality.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged
after shooting. During the image processing, “buSY” will be displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is complete.
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene
 In flash photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out significantly bright (overexposure).
 In flash photography, if you shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots
may not align correctly. This may result in a blurry picture.
 In flash photography, if the human subject is close to the background that
is also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This
may result in a blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors
may also appear.
 Flash coverage angle with an external Speedlite:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the
zoom position will be fixed to the wide (wide-angle) end, regardless of
the lens’s zoom position.
• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set
the flash head to the normal position.
Cautions for <G> HDR Backlight Control
 Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
 HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
 When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright as they are, for
example for normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the
HDR effect.
110
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
In the <v> (Creative filter) mode, you can apply one of ten filter effects
(Grainy B/W*, Soft focus*, Fish-eye effect*, Water painting effect*, Toy
camera effect*, Miniature effect*, HDR art standard, HDR art vivid, HDR
art bold, and HDR art embossed) for shooting. When the camera is set
for Live View shooting, you can see the effect on the screen before you
start shooting. The camera saves only the image with the Creative filter
applied.
For the effects marked with an asterisk, you can also take a picture without a
Creative filter, then apply the effect afterward and save it as a new image (p.392).
1
Set the Mode Dial to <v>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image.
[Creative filters] with Quick
3 Select
Control.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[G] on the upper left of the screen,
then press <0>.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and select [Choose filter].
111
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
a shooting mode.
4 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
shooting mode, then press <0>.
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
Available Shooting Modes in the v Mode
Shooting Mode
Page
G
Grainy B/W
p.113
c
Shooting Mode
Page
Miniature effect
p.114
W
Soft focus
p.113
A HDR art standard
p.114
X
Fish-eye effect
p.113
B HDR art vivid
p.114
Z
Water painting effect
p.114
C HDR art bold
p.115
H
Toy camera effect
p.114
D HDR art embossed
p.115
the effect.
5 Adjust
 Press the <Q> button and select the
icon below [Creative filters] (except
for c, A, B, C, and D).
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
the picture.
6 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
112
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
 You cannot select 1+73 or 1. If 1+73 or 1 is set, the image
will be recorded in 73 quality.
 When <G>, <W>, <X>, <Z>, <H>, or <c> is set, continuous
shooting cannot be set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.341) will not be appended to images shot with Fisheye effect applied.
 <c> is set to <b> (Flash Off) by default. Try to prevent camera shake
when shooting in low-light conditions.
During Live View Shooting
 With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
 With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in
the picture.
 The histogram is not displayed.
 Magnified view is not possible.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set some Creative filters with Quick
Control (p.251).
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands
the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the
image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF point will be
fixed to the one at the center.
113
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that
makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the
color cast by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect.
If you want the image center to look sharp, take the picture without
changing any setting.
To move the area that looks sharp (miniature effect frame) in Live
View shooting, see “Adjusting Miniature Effect” (p.116). The AF
method will be Live 1-point AF. Positioning the miniature effect frame
over the AF point before shooting is recommended.
During viewfinder shooting, aim the center AF point over the subject
and shoot.
 A HDR art standard
Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. The low contrast
and flat gradation create a painting-like effect. The subject outlines
will have bright (or dark) edges.
 B HDR art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [HDR art standard], and
the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
For <A> <B> <C> <D>, clipped highlights and shadows will be
reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even with high-contrast scenes.
Three images of different exposures are captured continuously for
each shot and merged into a single image. See the cautions on
page 115.
114
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
 C HDR art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture looks like an oil painting.
 D HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bolder bright (or dark) edges.
Cautions for <A> HDR Art Standard, <B> HDR Art Vivid,
<C> HDR Art Bold, and <D> HDR Art Embossed
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 The Live View image displayed with the filter applied will not look exactly
the same as the actual captured image.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
 If you are handholding the camera, try to prevent camera shake when
shooting.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.
 Shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged
after shooting. During the image processing, “buSY” will be displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is complete.
 Flash photography is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may
be emitted (p.127).
115
v Shooting with Creative Filter Effects
Adjusting Miniature Effect
1
Move the AF point.
 Move the AF point to where you want
to focus on.
 If the AF point is not fully covered by
the miniature effect frame, the [r]
icon on the bottom right of the screen
will blink. In the next step, adjust the
position of the miniature effect frame
so that it covers the AF point.
the miniature effect frame.
2 Move
 Press the <u> button (or tap the [r]
icon on the bottom right of the
screen). The miniature effect frame
will turn orange and can be moved.
 Press the <B> button (or tap the
[T] icon on the bottom left of the
screen) to switch between the
miniature effect frame’s vertical and
horizontal orientations.
 Press <0> to set the position of the
miniature effect frame.
 Press <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> to
move the AF point or miniature effect
frame. Press the <L> button to
return the AF point or miniature effect
frame to the screen center.
3 Take the picture.
116
Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes, press the <Q> button to display the Quick
Control screen. You can set the items shown in the tables on pages
118-119.
Example: <C>
the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
1 Set
mode.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function. (This step is
not necessary in the 7 mode.)
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.63) will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
 You can also select from a list by
selecting a function and pressing
<0>.
 When [s: Shooting screen: Guided] is set, a screen such as the
following will appear.
Example: <C>
117
Q Quick Control
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o: Default setting* k: User selectable
Function
A
7
C
2
3
4
5
u: Single shooting
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
G
o: High-speed continuous shooting
Drive
mode
(p.147)
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
Q: 10sec.
l: 2sec.
q: Continuous shooting
Built-in
flash firing
a: Automatic firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
o
Ambience-based shots (p.94)
Background blur (p.92)
Brightness (p.120)
Function
Drive
mode
(p.147)
Built-in
flash firing
: Not selectable
8
q
C
P
x
6
F
u: Single shooting
o
k
o
o
o
o
o
o: High-speed continuous shooting
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Q: 10sec.
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
l: 2sec.
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
q: Continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
a: Automatic firing
o
o
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
k
k
b: Flash off
k
k
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
Brightness (p.120)
Color tone (p.104, 105)
o
k
o
k
k
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the
functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).
118
o
o
Q Quick Control
o: Default setting* k: User selectable
Function
u: Single shooting
: Not selectable
G
o
W
o
v
X
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
c
o
A
o
k
k
k
k
k
v
B
o
k
k
k
k
k
C
o
k
k
k
k
k
D
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
Z
o
H
o
o: High-speed continuous shooting
Drive
mode
(p.147)
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
Q: 10sec.
l: 2sec.
q: Continuous shooting
Built-in
flash firing
a: Automatic firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
Adjustment of effects (p.111)
Function
u: Single shooting
o: High-speed continuous shooting
Drive
mode
(p.147)
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
Q: 10sec.
l: 2sec.
q: Continuous shooting
Built-in
flash firing
a: Automatic firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
k
k
k
k
k
o
Adjustment of effects (p.111)
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the
functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).
119
Adjusting the Brightness
In Basic Zone modes, when a mode other than <A>, <7>, <C>,
<8: G>, or <v> is set, you can adjust the brightness for shooting.
You can adjust both the brightness and darkness across 3-step ranges
with 0 being the standard.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <2>, <3>,
<4>, <5>, or <8>.
 When <8> is set, set to <q>,
<C>, <P>, <x>, <6>, or <F>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image (except <x>).
Quick Control, select the
3 With
desired brightness.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[wBrightness], then press the
<Y> <Z> keys to select the desired
brightness.
 The image with the selected brightness
adjustment applied will appear.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting, press the <A> button to exit
Live View shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to
<2>, the setting will revert to [0] (standard).
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, start the operation from step 3.
120
x Image Playback
The easiest way to play back images is described below. For more
details on the playback procedure, see page 345.
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the <5> dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the display will change.
No information
Basic information
display
Shooting information display
121
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.121), you can press
the <W> <X> keys to change the shooting information displayed at the
screen bottom as follows. For details, see pages 386-387.
Detailed information
Lens aberration correction information
Lens / Histogram information
Color space / Noise reduction information
White balance information
Picture Style information 2
Picture Style information 1
 The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and
settings.
 If you use GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the
image, the “GPS information” screen will also appear.
122
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder are
arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.31).
 In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation is set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
123
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics to suit the
shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF
operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
the Mode Dial to a Creative
2 Turn
Zone mode.
the <Zf> button.
3 Press
 [AF operation] will appear.
the AF operation.
4 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired AF operation, then press
<0>.
on the subject.
5 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF operation.
In Creative Zone modes, you can also press the <p> button to
autofocus.
124
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
 The AF point that achieves focus is
displayed, and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder will also light
up.
 With evaluative metering, the
AF point
exposure setting will be set at the
Focus indicator
same time focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot or see “Subjects
Difficult to Focus on” (p.145) and try to focus again.
 If [53: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful
when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area
AF frame.
 When a lens equipped with an electronic manual focusing function is
used, see page 128.
125
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject
continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode (p.129) is set to Automatic
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
126
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in lowlight conditions or on a dark subject. In Creative Zone modes, you can
set whether to have the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved
(p.406).
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the
subject to help autofocusing.
 AF-assist beam will not be emitted from the built-in flash in <7>, <3>,
<5>, or <8: C> modes, or when [Built-in flash firing] is set to
<b> in <A>, <C>, <2>, <4>, <8: qPF>, or <v:
GWXZHc> modes.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
 The built-in flash makes a sound when firing continuously. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
 The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet.
 In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the <D>
button, the AF-assist beam will be emitted as necessary. Note that
depending on the setting for [5: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF-assist beam will not be emitted (p.404).
127
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
3 Setting Lens Electronic MF
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic
manual focusing function, you can set whether to use electronic manual
focusing in One-Shot AF mode. The default setting is [Disable after
One-Shot AF].
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS STM EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
* As of the product’s release date.
1
Select [Lens electronic MF].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
electronic MF], then press <0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
 Disable after One-Shot AF
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
 Enable after One-Shot AF
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep
holding down the shutter button halfway.
128
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point
patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For details, see “Lenses and
Usable AF Points” on page 137.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of four AF area selection modes. For the selection
procedure, see the next page.
E: Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
F: Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine focusing zones is used to
focus.
G: Large Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of three focusing zones (left, center,
and right) is used to focus.
H: Automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus.
129
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> or <B> button
(9).
 Look through the viewfinder and
press the <S> or <B> button.
the <B> button.
2 Press
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
 In the <8: x> and <v: Xc> modes, you cannot select the AF
area. Single-point AF (fixed at center) is applied for shooting.
 In Basic Zone modes, if you change the shooting mode or set the power
switch to <2>, the setting will revert to the default.
In Creative Zone modes, if you set [6: AF area selection method] under
[54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] to [1:S9Main Dial], you can select the
AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> or <B> button, then turning
the <6> dial (p.404).
130
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1
Press the <S> or <B> button
(9).
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone
AF mode, the selected zone will be
displayed.
<6>
<5>
an AF point.
2 Select
 You can select an AF point in
horizontal direction with the <6>
dial or vertical direction with the <5>
dial.
 If you press <0>, the center AF
point (or center zone) will be
selected.
 In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
 You can also select an AF point or
zone in horizontal direction with the
<Y> <Z> keys or vertical direction
with the <W> <X> keys.
 When you hold down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial, you can
select an AF point in vertical direction.
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the LCD panel displays the
following:
• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF: M AF
• Single-point AF: SEL N (Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)
131
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> or <B> button lights up the AF points that are
cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF
points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see
pages 136-140.
132
AF Area Selection Modes
S Single-point AF (Manual selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
m Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. Since all
the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF,
it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is also
effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
n Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)
for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all
the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF,
it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is also
effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
133
AF Area Selection Modes
o Automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. The AF point(s)
achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are
displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.
This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected (p.131)
AF point <S> is used first to achieve focus. The
AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
 When AI Servo AF mode is set for Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic
selection AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
 If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle or telephoto lens is used,
achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. In such a case, use the center AF point or
an AF point close to the center.
 When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. This is a characteristic of AF point display.
 In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is
a characteristic of AF point display. Also, the tracking response may
become slower.
134
AF Area Selection Modes
AF Using Color Tracking
By default, AF will be performed based on color tracking.
However, in the <3>, <4>, <8: Px6F> and <v: Xc> modes, AF
will not be performed based on color tracking. When the AF area selection
mode is set to Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF, focus is
achieved as follows:
 In One-Shot AF Mode
Focusing on a still human subject in the AF area is made easier.
 In AI Servo AF Mode
Focusing on a human subject in the AF area is made easier. If no skin
tones can be detected, the nearest subject will be focused on. Once focus
is achieved, AF points are automatically selected so that the camera
continues to focus on the color of the area it focused on first.
* In [7: Auto AF pt sel.:Color Tracking] under [54: Custom
Functions(C.Fn)], you can set whether to perform AF by tracking colors. If
[1:Disable] is set, focus is achieved based only on AF information (p.405).
135
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows
the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using
lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is
possible at the viewfinder center.
Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point
patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For details, see “Lenses and
Usable AF Points” on page 137.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
(some also supporting f/8)
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
(also supporting f/8)
This focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision
focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or
faster. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on
the subjects that may be difficult to focus. It is provided at
the center AF point.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some supporting
f/8). Since they have a horizontal pattern, they can detect
vertical lines. They cover all 45 AF points.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some supporting
f/8). Since they have a vertical pattern, they can detect
horizontal lines. They cover all 45 AF points.
136
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 Although the camera has 45 AF points, the number of usable AF
points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary depending
on the lens used. The lenses are thereby classified into eight
groups from A to H.
 Using a lens in Groups E to H will have fewer usable AF points.
 Lens groups are listed on pages 141-144. Check which group your
lens belongs to.
 The number of available AF points varies depending on aspect ratio
settings (p.156).
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the AF points at the position
indicated by the
mark will blink. (The / AF points will stay lit.)
Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 132.
 For the latest “Lens Group Designations” information, check with the
Canon website, etc.
 Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
the focusing precision is higher than
with other AF points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
137
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
Group C
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group D
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
138
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group E
Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF
points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group F
Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF
points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to vertical lines
(AF points in the horizontal array at
the top and bottom) or horizontal
lines (AF points in a vertical array on
the left and right).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
139
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group G
Autofocusing with 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF
points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected
in AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point selection, the
outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from
45-point Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group H
Autofocusing is possible only with the center AF point.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking performance is superior and
high-precision focusing is achieved.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting lowcontrast or low-light subjects.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (greater than f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
140
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations (As of the product’s release date)
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
A
B
D
B
B
A
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
B
D
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
A
A
A
A
B
E
B
A
A
B
A
B
F
A
A*
B*
A
A
B
A
B
141
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
142
B
A
B
B
A
B*
B*
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
A
B*
B*
A
B*
B*
A
B
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
B
A
B
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)*
B
B*
H (f/8)*
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
H (f/8)
E
H (f/8)
E
H (f/8)*
B
C
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
F
A
A
B
D
B
B
B
A
E
E
B
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
B
B
B
B
B
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
B
B
F
F
B
B
B
B
E
E
F
E
F
E
F
B
H
H
B
C
D
E
B
B
D
D
A
B**
B**
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
143
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
A
D
E
E
D
D
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x III
TS-E17mm f/4L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
TS-E45mm f/2.8
TS-E90mm f/2.8
B
C
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)
G (f/8)
B
B
B
H (f/8)
H (f/8)
G (f/8)
B
B
B
A
A
 If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
 When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination
marked with an asterisk (*) or a lens and extender in a combination
marked with two asterisks (**), precise focus may not be achieved with
AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the lens or extender
used.
If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use the tilt or shift
function.
144
Subjects Difficult to Focus on
Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder blinks) with special subjects such as the following:
 Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Subjects with repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
 Subjects with finer patterns than an AF point
(Example: Faces or flowers as small as or smaller than an AF point,
etc.)
In such cases, focus in either of the following two ways.
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.87).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 For conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View
shooting or movie shooting, see page 266.
145
Subjects Difficult to Focus on
MF: Manual Focus
the lens’s focus mode switch
1 Set
to <MF>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens focusing
Focusing ring
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
 If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF
point that achieved focus and the focus indicator <o> will light up in the
viewfinder.
 With Automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus,
the focus indicator <o> will light up.
146
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided.
1
Press the <YQi> button.
 [Drive mode] will appear.
the drive mode.
2 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired drive mode, then press
<0>.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o: High-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 6.0 shots/sec.)
When you press the shutter button completely, the camera will
shoot continuously while you keep holding it down.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
When you press the shutter button completely, the camera will
shoot continuously while you keep holding it down.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
l : 2-sec. self-timer
q : Self-timer: Continuous
For self-timer shooting, see page 149. For remote control
shooting, see page 423.
147
i Selecting the Drive Mode
 o: The approx. 6.0 shots/sec. maximum high-speed continuous
shooting speed is achieved under the following conditions*: 1/500 sec. or
faster shutter speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens),
flicker reduction disabled, fully charged battery pack, and at room
temperature (23°C / 73°F). The continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, power source, remaining
battery level, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off
when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.55.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS
USM.
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject conditions and the lens used.
 If you set [z5: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] (p.185) and shoot under
a flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease,
the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release time lag may
become longer.
 When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be
temporarily disabled.
 If you select [Smartphone] in [Bluetooth function] under
[51: Wireless communication settings], or if pairing is not complete
even if you select [Remote], <Q> will be changed to <m> and remote
shooting with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 or Remote Controller
RC-6 will not be possible.
148
j Using the Self-timer
the <YQi> button.
1 Press
 [Drive mode] will appear.
the self-timer.
2 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the self-timer, then press <0>.
Q: 10-sec. self-timer
The remote controller can also
be used (p.423).
l: 2-sec. self-timer (p.93)
q: 10-sec. self-timer plus
continuous shots
Press the <W> <X> keys to set
the number of multiple shots (2 to
10) to be taken with the self-timer.
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 2 sec. before the picture is taken, the
self-timer lamp will light up and the
beeper will sound faster.
 With <q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged
depending on the shooting functions settings such as the imagerecording quality or flash.
 If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.427). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.121) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.87) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap on the LCD monitor or
press the <YQi> button.
149
150
4
Image Settings
This chapter describes image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, aspect ratio, ISO speed,
Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
noise reduction, lens aberration correction, anti-flicker
shooting, and other functions.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.31).
151
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and its image quality. Nine imagerecording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, 1+73, 1.
1
Select the image-recording
quality.
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
 [Image quality] will appear.
Pixels recorded (pixel count)
Possible shots
the image-recording quality.
2 Set
 The respective quality’s pixel count
and number of possible shots will be
displayed to help you select the
desired quality. Then press <0>.
The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [****] displayed on
the image-recording quality setting screen always apply to the [3:2] setting
regardless of the [z5: Aspect ratio] setting (p.156).
152
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings
Image Quality
73
83
High
quality
74 Medium
84 quality JPEG
7a
8a
b
Low
quality
1+73
1
High
quality
Pixels
Recorded
24M
11M
5.9M
3.8M
24M
File Size
(MB)
(Approx.)
Possible
Shots
Maximum Burst
7.6
950
190 (Full)
3.9
1840
Full (Full)
4.1
1790
Full (Full)
2.0
3480
Full (Full)
2.6
2730
Full (Full)
1.3
5260
Full (Full)
Full (Full)
1.8
3810
29.4+7.6
170
19 (23)
29.4
210
21 (27)
* The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst are based on Canon’s testing
standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB
card. These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand, aspect
ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
* Figures in parentheses for the maximum burst apply to <o> high-speed
continuous shooting. Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I class 16 GB
card based on Canon’s testing standards.
 “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with the
listed conditions.
Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.
153
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
FAQ
 I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper
size for printing.
Refer to the diagram on the left when
Paper size
choosing the image-recording quality. If
A2(59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)
you want to crop the image, selecting a
73
higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,
A3(42x29.7cm/
83
83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.
1+73
16.5x11.7in.)
74
1
b is suitable for playing back the image
84
with a digital photo frame.
7a
b
8a
A4(29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)
12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.
 What’s the difference between 7 and 8?
These settings indicate the different levels of image quality caused
by different compression rates. The 7 setting produces a higher
image quality with the same number of pixels. Although 8 produces
a slightly lower image quality, this allows more images to be saved
on the card. b will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
 I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots
indicated.
Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take
more shots than is indicated. On the contrary, it may also be fewer
than indicated. The number of possible shots displayed is only
approximate.
 Does the camera display the maximum burst?
The maximum burst is displayed on the viewfinder’s right side. Since
it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 8 will
be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed
even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot
without a card in the camera.
 When should I use 1?
1 images must be processed on a computer. For details, see
“1” and “1+73” on the next page.
154
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
1
1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.
1 images cannot be viewed on a computer without the use of
software, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.488).
However, you can perform various adjustments on them that are
impossible with other image types such as 73. 1 is effective when
you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot an important
subject.
1+73
1+73 records a 1 image and a 73 image with a single shot. The
two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will
be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension
.JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can be viewed or
printed even with a computer that does not have EOS software
installed.
1 image
0001 . CR2
73 image
0001 . JPG
File number
File extension
RAW Image Processing Software
 To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended (p.488).
 Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with
this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your
computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon
website to update it. (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that
DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
155
3 Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioN
You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When
[4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, frame lines indicating the image area will be
displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image
appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.
1
Select the aspect ratio.
 Under the [z5] tab, select [Aspect
ratio], then press <0>.
the aspect ratio.
2 Set
 Select an aspect ratio, then press
<0>.
 JPEG images
The images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.
 RAW images
The images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. The
selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.
When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same
aspect ratio set for shooting. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1]
aspect ratios, the lines to indicate the aspect ratio will appear during
image playback, but they are not actually drawn on the captured
image.
156
3 Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioN
The table below shows the aspect ratio and the number of recorded
pixels for each image-recording quality.
Image
Quality
3/1
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
6000x4000
5328x4000*
6000x3368*
4000x4000
(24.0 megapixels) (21.3 megapixels) (20.2 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels)
4
3984x2656
3552x2664
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels)
3984x2240*
(8.9 megapixels)
2656x2656
(7.1 megapixels)
a
2976x1984
(5.9 megapixels)
2656x1992
(5.3 megapixels)
2976x1680*
(5.0 megapixels)
1984x1984
(3.9 megapixels)
b
2400x1600
(3.8 megapixels)
2112x1600*
(3.4 megapixels)
2400x1344*
(3.2 megapixels)
1600x1600
(2.6 megapixels)
 The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated
aspect ratio.
 The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio may be slightly
different from the actual image area. Check the captured images on the
LCD monitor during shooting.
157
g: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient
light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set automatically.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 278 and
281.
1
Press the <g> button (9).
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> or
<5> dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100 ISO 25600.
 “A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.159).
 When the screen shown on the left is
displayed, you can press the <B>
button to set it to “AUTO”.
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 25600, H Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
Flash Range
The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the effective flash
range will be (p.216).
 You can also set with [z2: zISO speed].
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to
[1:On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) can also be selected (p.402).
158
g: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1:Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be
selected (p.403).
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 As “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower compared to the standard
setting.
Automatic ISO speed setting: ISO [AUTO]
 If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto),
the actual ISO speed setting will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
 When “A” (Auto) is set, the ISO speed
is indicated in whole-stop increments.
However, the ISO speed is actually
set in finer increments. Therefore, in
the image’s shooting information
(p.385), you may find an ISO speed
such as ISO 125 or ISO 640
displayed as the ISO speed.
159
g: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [AUTO]N
For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within
ISO 400 - ISO 25600.
Under the [z2] tab, select [zISO
Auto], then press <0>. Select the ISO
speed, then press <0>.
160
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image
characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the
subject.
1
Press the <XA> button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<0>.
 The Picture Style will be set.
You can also set the Picture Style with [z3: Picture Style].
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
161
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.165), you can adjust the skin tone.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
Geared for users who prefer to process images with their computer.
For natural colors and subdued images with modest brightness and
color saturation.
U Faithful
Geared for users who prefer to process images with their computer.
The color of a subject that is captured in ambient light at a color
temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject’s
colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest brightness
and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. Be
careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to shoot
photos in color again.
You can set the camera to display <i> in the viewfinder for when
[Monochrome] is set (p.407).
W User Defined 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (p.167). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
162
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast], and other
parameters. The numerals indicate the values for these parameters set
for the respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
g
J
Strength
K
Fineness
L
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
During movie shooting, “ * ” will be displayed for both [Fineness] and
[Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
163
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other
parameters from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 166.
1
Press the <XA> button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<B> button.
a parameter.
3 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Strength] of [Sharpness]) to be set,
then press <0>.
 See page 165 for settings and effects.
the parameter.
4 Set
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the effect of the parameter, then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameter settings. The
Picture Style selection screen will
reappear.
 The value of parameter settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
164
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
J Strength
0: Weak outline emphasis
K Fineness*1
1: Fine
7: Strong outline emphasis
5: Grainy
L Threshold*2
1: Low
5: High
+4: High contrast
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low.
However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
 For movie shooting, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot
be set (not displayed).
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
165
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as
[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for
[Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in the
selected color. Effective when you want
to create more impressive images.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
166
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple
Picture Styles with different settings.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.488) here.
1
Press the <XA> button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
2 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
<0>.
3 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style registered to the camera with
EOS Utility (EOS software), select the
Picture Style here.
167
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
5 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Strength] of [Sharpness]) to be set,
then press <0>.
the parameter.
6 Set
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the effect of the parameter, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.164-166).
 Press the <M> button to register
the adjusted parameter settings. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be indicated
on the right of [User Def. *].
 If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the
base Picture Style in step 4 will clear the parameter settings of the
previously registered User Defined Picture Style.
 If you perform [Clear all camera settings] under [54: Clear settings]
(p.335), all the [User Def. *] styles and settings will revert to their
defaults. Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility (EOS software) will
have only its modified parameters reverted to the default setting.
 To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 161 to
select [User Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
168
B: Matching the Light SourceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
In Basic Zone modes, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In
the <P> mode, [Qw] (White priority) is set.)
1
Press the <WB> button.
 [White balance] will appear.
a white balance setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)
displayed for the white balance
settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y>
or <U> is the respective color
temperature to be set.
You can also set with [z3: White balance].
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color tones can be taken.
169
B: Matching the Light SourceN
Q Auto White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you
select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
the <WB> button.
1 Press
 [White balance] will appear.
[Q].
2 Select
 With [Q] selected, press the
<B> button.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q : Auto: Ambience priority
Qw : Auto: White priority
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
 The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
 When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q]
(Ambience priority).
170
B: Matching the Light SourceN
O Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can set the white balance for the
specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this
procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
1
Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any of the white balance
settings.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Select the image captured in step 1,
then press <0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK], and the data will be
imported.
 When the menu reappears, press the
<M> button to exit the menu.
171
B: Matching the Light SourceN
[O (Custom)].
4 Select
 Press the <WB> button.
 Select [O (Custom)], then press
<0>.
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with
the Picture Style set to [Monochrome] (p.162), images shot with a
Creative filter, images processed with a Creative filter after shooting,
cropped images, and images shot with another camera.
The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (EOS software,
p.488) will be registered under [O]. If you perform step 3, the data for the
registered personal white balance will be erased.
172
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who
understand the use of color temperature conversion and color
compensating filters and their effects.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
 The WB correction/WB bracketing
screen will appear.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

Sample setting: A2, G1



keys to move the “ ” mark to the
appropriate position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The
image’s color balance will be adjusted
toward the color in the direction of the
move.
On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
 You can set the camera to display <i> in the viewfinder and on the LCD
monitor for when white balance correction is set (p.407).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color
temperature conversion filter.)
173
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance
bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it
counterclockwise sets the M/G
bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
 During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst will be lower and
the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx. one-third the
normal number.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 During Live View shooting, the white balance icon will blink.
 “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
174
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected as
necessary.
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1:Enable], [Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be set automatically to
[Disable].
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the checkmark [X] for
[Disable during man expo] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be
set in the <a> mode.
175
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced. Change the
setting to match the noise level.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 [M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to 1 or 1+73, you cannot
set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
You can set the camera to display <i> in the viewfinder for when Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is set (p.407).
176
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
When [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is Set
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may become smaller.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is complete.
 You cannot use AEB and white balance bracketing.
 If [z4: Long exp. noise reduction], AEB, or white balance bracketing
is set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.
 The [Distortion] setting will be set automatically to [Disable].
 Flash photography is not possible. However, the AF-assist beam will be
emitted according to the setting of [5: AF-assist beam firing] under
[54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
 If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode, shoot a bulb exposure, or shoot a movie, the setting will
automatically be changed to [Standard].
 [z4: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
177
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 [Auto]
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective enough in most cases.
 [Enable]
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
 With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture
is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You
cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is complete.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Auto] or [Enable] set, if a long exposure is shot with the Live View
image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction
process. The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
complete. (You cannot take another picture.)
178
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to
Optical CharacteristicsN
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Color fringing
along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. Image distortion
due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion. And
decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction
phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected.
By default, [Peripheral illum corr], [Chromatic aberr corr], and
[Diffraction correction] are set to [Enable], and [Distortion
correction] is set to [Disable].
If the lens correction data is registered (saved) in the camera,
peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and
diffraction correction will be applied even in Basic Zone modes.
If the setting screen displays [Correction data not available] or the
[F] icon, it means that the correction data for the respective lens is not
registered in the camera. See “Lens Correction Data” on page 183.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Peripheral illum corr].
179
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
[Enable].
3 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
4 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
 Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
 If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction will not be reflected in the image displayed on the
screen.
The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.488).
180
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1 Select [Chromatic aberr corr].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
Distortion Correction
1 Select [Distortion correction].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.
181
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
 Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image
periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)
 Distortion correction will be reflected in the captured image, but it cannot
be seen in the viewfinder during shooting.
 Distortion correction cannot be set during movie shooting or when Multi
Shot Noise Reduction is set.
 Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect
the angle of view.
 When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion
correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, magnifying
the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not be
recorded.
 Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete
Data (p.341) appended. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed
(p.388) for image playback.
Diffraction Correction
1 Select [Diffraction correction].
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
diffraction corrected.
 Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together
with the effects of correction.
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
 Diffraction correction will not be applied to the Live View image.
 For movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction
is not possible.)
With “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter,
etc. is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is effective
even at an aperture close to the open aperture.
182
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Lens Correction Data
The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral
illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically.
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.488), you can check which lenses
have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also
register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
183
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN
Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction,
distortion correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to
JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the
lens used does not have distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens
used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern
depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
 Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter
is attached.
 If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable] (except for diffraction correction).
 In Basic Zone modes, peripheral illumination correction, chromatic
aberration correction, and diffraction correction will be applied
automatically. Distortion correction will be applied automatically only in
the <q> mode.
184
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result. When you use this feature during
viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the flickering frequency of the
light source and takes the picture when the flicker causes less effect on
exposure or color tone.
1
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z5] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
 The picture will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous
shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may
become irregular.
 This function does not work with mirror lockup shooting, Live View
shooting or movie shooting.
 In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous
shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter
speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color
tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter speed.
 The color tone of the captured images when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set
to [Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during
continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
185
3 Reducing FlickerN
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if you set [10: Mirror lockup] to
[1:Enable], the [Anti-flicker shoot.] setting will automatically switch to
[Disable].
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed in the
viewfinder.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected
result may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, set [Flicker detection] to
[Show] under [52: Viewfinder display] (p.81). When you shoot with
flicker reduction, <G> will light up. Under a light source that does
not flicker or with no flicker detected, <G> will not be displayed.
 If [Flicker detection] is set to [Show] and [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause <G>
to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting to [Enable] before
shooting is recommended.
 In Basic Zone modes, <G> will not be displayed, but the effects of
flicker will be reduced when you shoot.
 Flicker reduction also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained for wireless flash photography.
186
3 Setting the Color Reproduction RangeN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically.
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design
rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing
of the image with computer software will therefore be required.
 If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character
in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
187
188
5
Advanced Operations
for Photographic Effects
Cre
ati
v
e
ne
Zo
In Creative Zone modes, you
can change various settings of
the camera as you desire to
obtain a wide variety of
shooting results, by selecting
the shutter speed and/or
aperture, adjusting the
exposure as you prefer, etc.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes.
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let it go, the
exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec. (0) by the
metering timer function.
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
436.
Set the <R> switch downward.
189
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> on the viewfinder’s
bottom right will light up (in One-Shot
AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 The standard exposure will be
obtained as long as the shutter speed
and aperture displays do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
If a description of the shooting mode appears in step 1, press <0> to hide
it (p.62).
190
d: Program AE
Shooting Tips
 Change the ISO speed. Use the built-in flash.
To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the
ISO speed (p.158) or use the built-in flash (p.216). In the <d>
mode, the built-in flash will not fire automatically. Therefore, press
the <D> (flash) button to raise the built-in flash when indoors or
shooting in low light.
 Change the program using Program shift.
After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to
change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination
(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture
is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO
speed or use flash.
 If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO
speed.
Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. However, with <d> mode, only the shutter speed and
aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering
mode, and other functions (p.430).
191
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>
(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen motion
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
 See “Shooting Tips” on the next page
for advice on setting the shutter
speed.
 Turning the <6> dial clockwise sets
a faster shutter speed, and turning it
counterclockwise sets a slower one.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you focus and press the
shutter button completely, the picture
will be taken at the set shutter speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the
LCD panel and the viewfinder display only the denominator. “0"5” indicates
0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
192
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
Shooting Tips
 To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject
Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.
according to the speed of the moving subject.
 To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of
motion
Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow
the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter
button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady
to prevent camera shake.
 To blur a flowing river or fountain
Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to
prevent hand-held camera shake.
 Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the shutter speed with the aperture displayed, the
aperture value will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the image
sensor). In this operation, if the aperture value
exceeds the adjustable range, it will blink to indicate
that the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (lowest f/
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO
speed.
If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest f/
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial clockwise to
set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure on the main subject, the flash
output will be set automatically (autoflash) to match the
automatically-set aperture. Note that the range of settable shutter
speed will be limited within 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.
193
f: Changing the Depth of Field
To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,
set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
* <f> stands for Aperture value (the size of the lens diaphragm opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
 The higher the f/number, the wider
the depth of field where sharper focus
is obtained in both the foreground
and background.
 Turning the <6> dial clockwise sets
a higher f/number (smaller aperture
opening), and turning it
counterclockwise sets a lower f/
number (larger aperture opening).
the picture.
3 Take
 When you focus and press the shutter
button completely, the picture will be
taken with the set aperture.
Aperture Value Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/
number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
194
f: Changing the Depth of Field
Shooting Tips
 When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low
light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.
A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.
Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such
cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a
tripod.
 The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on
the lens and on the subject distance.
Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of
acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need
not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the
foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens
has a narrow depth of field.
And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther
subject will have a wider depth of field.
 Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not
blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the aperture with the shutter speed displayed, the
shutter speed will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the
image sensor). In this operation, if the shutter
speed exceeds the adjustable range, it will blink to
indicate that the standard exposure cannot be
obtained.
If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed
display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise to set a lower f/number or increase the ISO speed.
If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter
speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial
clockwise to set a higher f/number or decrease the ISO speed.
195
f: Changing the Depth of Field
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be automatically
controlled (autoflash) to match the set aperture. The shutter speed will
be set automatically within the range of 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to match
the brightness of the scene.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the autoflash, and the
background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. The
picture comes out with the standard exposure for both the subject and
background with a touch of the atmosphere (automatic slow-speed
flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to
prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended to prevent
camera shake.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200
sec. (fixed)] (p.224).
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
While looking at the Live View image (p.242) and holding down the depth-offield preview button, you can see how the range of acceptable focus will
change as you adjust the aperture.
196
a: Manual Exposure
You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.
While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can
set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.158).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6>
<5>
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel.
 Check the exposure level mark <h> to
see how far the current exposure level
is from the standard exposure level.
the exposure and take the picture.
5 Set
 Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter
speed and aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±2 stops from the standard
exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I>
or <J> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. (On the LCD
monitor, if the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, <I> or <J> will
be displayed.)
The set exposure setting will not be applied to movie shooting.
197
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you
can set exposure compensation (p.205) as follows:
 [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
 [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn S)] with [14: Custom Controls]
under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] (p.409)
 Quick Control (p.65)
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the
standard exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
 If flash is used when ISO Auto is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
 Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark [X] for
[Disable during man expo] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.175).
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when the <A> button was pressed.
 If exposure compensation (p.205) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be
maintained when the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto
set.
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure on the main subject, the flash output
will be set automatically (autoflash) to match the manually-set aperture.
Note that the range of settable shutter speed will be limited within 1/200
sec. to 30 sec or to bulb.
198
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
to <BULB> (buLb).
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to set it.
the desired aperture.
3 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to set it.
the picture.
4 Take
 The exposure will continue for as long
Elapsed exposure time
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 During shooting, the elapsed
exposure time will be displayed on
the LCD panel.
199
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Since long bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image
may look slightly grainy.
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400.
 When shooting bulb exposures without using the bulb timer, if you use
both the self-timer and mirror lockup, keep pressing the shutter button
completely (for self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go
of the shutter button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a
shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb
timer under the same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding
down the shutter button completely.
 You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting [z4: Long
exp. noise reduction] to [Auto] or [Enable] (p.177).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. You
can also use mirror lockup (p.209) in combination.
 You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3
(sold separately, p.201).
 You can also use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately,
p.423) or Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.426) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s release button
(transmit button), the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later.
Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure.
200
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
p Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb
exposure. This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only for <BULB> (bulb exposure). It cannot
be set (or will not function) in any other mode.
1
Select [Bulb timer].
 Under the [z5] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
 Select the hour, minute, or second.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
201
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
[OK].
4 Select
 The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <p>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Bulb timer
Elapsed exposure time
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
 During bulb timer shooting, <p>
will blink.
 To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
 The <q> drive mode cannot be selected.
 While the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button
completely and release it, the bulb exposure will stop.
 If you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure
starts, the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time
elapses. (The bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set
exposure time elapses.)
 Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, switch to movie shooting, or
change to a mode other than <BULB>.
202
q Changing the Metering ModeN
Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness are
provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended. In Basic Zone
modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the <8: x> and
<v: X> modes, center-weighted average metering is set.)
1
Select [Metering mode].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Metering
mode], then press <0>.
the metering mode.
2 Set
 Select the desired metering mode,
then press <0>.
q Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even
for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights
around the subject due to backlight, etc. The
gray area in the left figure is approximately
where the brightness is metered to obtain the
standard exposure.
r Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the
subject or scene. The gray area in the left figure
is approximately where the brightness is
metered to obtain the standard exposure. This
metering mode is for advanced users.
203
q Changing the Metering ModeN
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is averaged for the entire scene
with the screen center weighted more heavily.
This metering mode is for advanced experts.
With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you
press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial
metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering)
modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the
shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
204
Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN
Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not
come out as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes
(except <a>). You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops*
in 1/3-stop increments.
If the <a> mode and ISO Auto are both set, see page 198 to set the
exposure compensation.
* In Live View shooting/movie shooting, or when [s: Shooting screen] is set to
[Guided], exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.
Increased exposure
for a brighter image
1
Check the exposure level indicator.
 Press the shutter button halfway (0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
the compensation amount.
2 Set
 While looking at the viewfinder or
Decreased exposure
for a darker image
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the <5>
dial.
 For exposure compensation, the
<O> icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel the exposure
compensation, set the compensation
amount back to <E>.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.175) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The set exposure compensation level will not be applied to movie shooting.
 When you set the power switch to <2>, the exposure compensation
setting will be canceled.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the
<R> switch upward to prevent the exposure compensation amount
from changing inadvertently.
 The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel goes up to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation
amount exceeds ±2 stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will
display <I> or <J>.
 If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it
with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.206) is recommended.
205
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the
exposure automatically in the range of ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments
with three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.
This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).
Standard exposure
Darker exposure
(Decreased exposure)
1
Brighter exposure
(Increased exposure)
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press <0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
exposure compensation amount. If
AEB is combined with exposure
compensation, AEB will be applied
centering on level of exposure
compensation.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you press the <M> button
to exit the menu, the AEB range will
be displayed on the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The three bracketed
shots will be taken in this sequence:
standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
206
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
Canceling AEB
 Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB range display (set to 0).
 The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power
switch is set to <2>, flash recharging is complete, etc.
Shooting Tips
 Using AEB with continuous shooting
If you set the drive mode to <o> or <i> (p.147) and press the
shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken
consecutively in the sequence of standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure, and then the camera will
automatically stop shooting.
 Using AEB with single shooting (u)
Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed
shots. The three bracketed shots will be taken in the following
sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold
separately)
With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<Q> or <l>),
you can take three consecutive shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
With <q> (p.149) set, the number of consecutive shots will be
three times the number set.
 During AEB, <A> and AEB range in the viewfinder will blink.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, when [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is
set, for shooting with a Creative filter, or with bulb exposures.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.175) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.
207
A Locking the ExposureN
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and
exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then
recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed.
the <A> button (0).
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is
locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 When you are to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <A> button and
press the shutter button to take
another picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering
Mode
(p.203)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.131)
Automatic Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is implemented with
the exposure weighting centered on the center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
208
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Vibration BlurN
You can use the mirror lockup function to prevent the disturbing
mechanical vibrations (mirror shock) when shooting with super
telephoto lenses or shooting close-ups (macro photography).
Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [10: Mirror lockup] to
[1:Enable] in [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.406).
1 Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.
 The mirror will swing up.
2 Press the shutter button completely again.
 The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
 After taking the picture, set [10: Mirror lockup] to [0:Disable].
Shooting Tips
 Using the self-timer <Q>, <l> with mirror lockup
When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up.
The picture will be then taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.
 Remote control shooting
Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote
control shooting together with mirror lockup can further reduce the
camera vibration blur (p.423). With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(sold separately) or Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) set to
a 2-sec. delay, press the release button (transmit button) to lock up
the mirror, and the picture will be taken 2 sec. after the mirror lockup.
209
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Vibration BlurN
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
 When shooting with mirror lockup without using the bulb timer, if you use
both the self-timer and bulb exposures, keep pressing the shutter button
completely (for self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go
of the shutter button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a
shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb
timer under the same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding
down the shutter button completely.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings, menu operations, etc.
are disabled.
 When you use flash, the red-eye reduction lamp will not light up (p.217).
 Even if you set the drive mode to <o>, <i>, or <q>, the camera
will still shoot in single shooting mode.
 When [z4: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction], four consecutive shots will be taken for a single picture
regardless of the [10: Mirror lockup] setting.
 If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back
down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the
mirror again.
 When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch
RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.427) is recommended.
210
p Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
1
Select [Interval timer].
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z1] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Interval
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
the shooting interval and
3 Set
number of shots.
 Select the item to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 Interval
Settable in the range from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 Number of shots
Settable in the range from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will
keep shooting an unlimited number of shots until you stop the
interval timer shooting.
211
p Interval Timer Shooting
Number of shots
Shooting interval
[OK].
4 Select
 The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <p>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Interval timer
the picture.
5 Take
 First shot is taken and shooting
continues according to the interval
timer settings.
 During interval timer shooting,
<p> will blink.
 After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, approx. 5 sec.
before the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings,
menu operation, image playback, and other operations will be
suspended, and the camera will go back to shooting-ready state.
 If a picture is being taken or an image is being processed when the next
shot is scheduled on the interval timer, the shot set for that time will be
skipped. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set
for interval timer shooting.
 Auto power off operates with the interval timer after approx. 8 sec. of
non-operation regardless of the [52: Auto power off] setting. The
power will automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.
 Interval timer shooting can also be combined with AEB and white
balance bracketing.
 You can stop the interval timer shooting in progress by selecting
[Disable] or turning the power switch to <2>.
212
p Interval Timer Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually
before shooting is recommended.
 Live View shooting, movie shooting, bulb exposures, or mirror lockup
cannot be performed with interval timer.
 If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet
accessories (sold separately, p.422) is recommended.
 If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval, such as a long
exposure, is set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. The
camera will thereby shoot fewer still photos than the number set for
interval timer shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when
the shutter speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.
 If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the
shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
 If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recharging time. If the interval is too short, the flash may not
fire.
 If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
may capture an image without autofocusing.
 The interval timer will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do any of
the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live View
shooting or movie shooting screen, set the camera for bulb exposures, or
use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.488).
 After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
shooting (p.423) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite.
 If your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece during interval
timer shooting, attach the eyepiece cover (p.427). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 When [Interval timer] is set to [Enable], [Clean nowf] or [Clean
manually] under [54: Sensor cleaning] cannot be selected.
213
214
6
Flash Photography
This chapter describes how to shoot with built-in flash
and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),
how to set flash settings on the camera’s menu screen,
and how to use the built-in flash for wireless flash
photography.
 Flash cannot be used in movie shooting. (It will not fire.)
 AEB cannot be used in flash photography.
215
D Using the Built-in Flash
In indoor, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-in
flash and press the shutter button to easily take beautiful pictures. In the
<d> mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set
automatically to prevent camera shake.
1
Press the <D> button.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can
press the <D> button anytime to take
flash pictures.
 While the flash is recharging, “buSY”
is displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
 In the bottom left of the viewfinder,
check that the <D> icon is displayed.
the picture.
3 Take
 When focus is achieved and you
press the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire at all times.
Effective Range of Built-in Flash
(Approx. in meters / feet)
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
ISO Speed
(p.158)
Wide Angle
f/3.5
f/5.6
ISO 100
1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2
1 - 2.1 / 3.3 - 6.9
Telephoto
ISO 400
1 - 6.9 / 3.3 - 22.6
1 - 4.3 / 3.3 - 14.1
ISO 1600
1.7 - 13.7 / 5.6 - 44.9
1.1 - 8.6 / 3.6 - 28.2
ISO 6400
3.4 - 27.4 / 11.2 - 89.9
2.1 - 17.1 / 6.9 - 56.1
* When a high ISO speed is set and focusing distance is long, appropriate
exposure may not be obtained depending on the subject conditions, etc.
216
D Using the Built-in Flash
Shooting Tips
 In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.
If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO
speed.
 Detach the lens hood. Do not get too close to the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,
the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash
light. For important shots, play back the image and check to make
sure the picture does not look unnaturally dark at the bottom part.
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
 Under the [z2] tab (the [z1] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 For flash photography, when you
press the shutter button halfway, the
red-eye reduction lamp will light up.
Then when you press the shutter
button completely, the picture will be
taken.
 The red-eye reduction feature is more effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the
scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will
gradually shrink toward the center to turn off.
For best results, take the picture after this scale display disappears.
 The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the
individual subject.
217
D Using the Built-in Flash
y Flash Exposure CompensationN
Set the flash exposure compensation if the brightness of the subject
does not come out as desired (so you want to adjust the flash output) in
flash photography. You can set the flash exposure compensation up to
±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear
(p.65).
[y].
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select [y*].
 [Flash exposure comp.] will be
displayed at the bottom.
the compensation amount.
3 Set
 If the exposure is too dark, turn the
<6> dial clockwise (for increased
exposure).
If the exposure is too bright, turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise (for
decreased exposure).
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the <y> icon will
appear in the viewfinder.
 After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure
compensation by setting it back to 0.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.175) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash
exposure compensation is set.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold
separately, p.221), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with
the camera (Quick Control or External flash function settings). If it is set
with both the camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting
overrides the camera’s.
218
D Using the Built-in Flash
 The compensation amount will be retained even after you set the power
switch to <2>.
 You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash
settings] in [z2: Flash control] (p.226).
A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE lock)N
If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may
turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. Use FE
lock in such a case. After setting the flash output for the appropriate subject
brightness, you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and shoot.
This feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.
1
Press the <D> button.
 The built-in flash will be raised.
 Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
2 Focus on the subject.
the <A> button (8).
3 Press
 Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject where you want to lock the flash
exposure, then press the <A> button.
 The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
 In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light up.
 Each time you press the <A> button, a preflash is fired and the
required flash output is calculated and retained in memory.
219
D Using the Built-in Flash
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
 The flash is fired, and the picture is
taken.
 If the subject is too far away and the captured image comes out dark, the
<D> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
 FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.
220
D Using an External Speedlite
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash
photography easy.
For operation procedures, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s
menu screen, see pages 223-228.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with the flash function
settings (p.223), only [Flash exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be
set for [External flash func. setting]. ([Shutter sync.] can also be set
with certain EX-series Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the
flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD
monitor will change from y to 0 (when [s: Shooting screen] is set
to [Standard]).
221
D Using an External Speedlite
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash is fired at full output at all times.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at
1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than
1/200 sec.
Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes
properly with the camera.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly,
but malfunction may result.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not be fired.
222
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible
with the flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen
to set flash functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.
If you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera
and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For
details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash control].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
 The Flash control screen will appear.
the desired item.
2 Select
 Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low
light, the flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.127).
223
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE <f> mode.
 4 : Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
 6 : 1/200-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
 7 : 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.
224
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly
When you use the built-in flash or an
external, EX-series Speedlite compatible
with the flash function settings, you can
press the <D> button to directly display
the [Built-in flash settings] or [External
flash func. setting] screen without first
displaying the menu screen.
 With built-in flash
Press the <D> button twice.
 Press the button to raise the built-in
flash.
 Press the button again to display the
[Built-in flash settings] screen.
 If [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], the
[z2: Flash control] screen will
appear (p.223).
 With external Speedlite
Press the <D> button.
 With the external Speedlite turned on,
press the <D> button to display the
[External flash func. setting]
screen.
When you press the <D> button to display the flash function setting screen,
you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], [Flash sync. speed in Av
mode], or [External flash C.Fn setting]. Set these functions with [z2:
Flash control] instead.
225
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]
You can set the functions in the table below. The functions displayed under
[External flash func. setting] vary depending on the Speedlite model.
 Select [Built-in flash settings] or
[External flash func. setting].
 The flash function setting screen will
be displayed. With [Built-in flash
settings], only the highlighted
functions can be selected and set.
Flash mode
[Built-in flash settings]
[External flash func. setting]
Wireless functions
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
Shutter
synchronization
Main Functions for [Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings]
Function
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash exposure
bracketing*
Wireless functions
Flash exposure
compensation
Flash ratio control
Master flash firing
Flash zoom*
[Built-in flash settings]
[External
Easy
Custom flash func.
Wireless Wireless
setting]
(p.232)
(p.235)
k
k
Normal
Firing
k
k
Page
227
227
k
k
k
k
k
227
k
k
218
k
k
k
k
* For [Flash exposure bracketing] and [Flash zoom], refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.
226
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
 Flash mode
When using an external Speedlite, you can select the flash mode to
suit your desired photographic effects.
 [E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic
flash photography.
 [Manual flash] is the mode for
advanced users who want to set the
[Flash output] (1/1 to 1/128)
themselves.
 Regarding other flash modes, refer to
the instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the respective flash
mode.
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash
fires immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired
right before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow
shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights
at night with a more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization
is set together with [E-TTL II], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once
when you press the shutter button completely and once right before the
end of the exposure. Also, if the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster,
first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically.
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [High-speed
synchronization] (e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
 Wireless functions
When performing the optical transmission wireless flash
photography using the master function of the built-in flash, see
“Using Wireless Flash” on page 229. When performing the wireless
flash photography with radio or optical transmission using the
master function of the external Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Flash exposure compensation
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 218.
227
3 Setting the Flash FunctionN
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions
The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]
vary depending on the Speedlite model.
1
Display the Custom Function.
 With the camera ready to shoot with
an external Speedlite, select
[External flash C.Fn setting], then
press <0>.
the Custom Function.
2 Set
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the function number, then set the
function. The procedure is the same
as setting the camera’s Custom
Functions (p.400).
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always
fire at full output.
Clear All Settings to Default
1
Select [Clear settings].
 Under the [z2: Flash control] tab,
select [Clear settings], then press
<0>.
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
 When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings will be cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the
camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it directly on the Speedlite.
228
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EXseries, external Speedlites equipped with a wireless slave feature. It
can wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.
Be sure to read the instructions and cautions about wireless flash
photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (hereafter slave unit), refer to its instruction
manual and set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for
the slave unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different models of
Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel
as set on the camera.*1
(3) For flash ratio control (p.237), set the slave unit’s firing group.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up
Approx. 10 m/32.8 ft.
Indoors
Approx. 7 m/23.0 ft.
Outdoors
Approx. 80°
Approx. 5 m/
16.4 ft.
Approx. 7 m/
23.0 ft.
229
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
*1: If the slave Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function,
the flash can work regardless of the camera’s channel setting.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not
face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals may be able to bounce off the
walls and enable wireless photography.
When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed light-emitting unit (flash head)
and wireless sensor, take pictures while making sure it can fire.
 Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A>
button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test
firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.
The camera’s master function cannot be used for wireless flash
photography with radio transmission.
230
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Wireless Flash Photography Configurations
The tables below show the possible configurations for wireless flash
photography. Select the configuration suiting the subject, shooting
conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.
External Speedlite
A:B Flash
Quantity
Ratio
Built-in
Page
Flash
Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions
Single
-
-
p.232
0
Single
-
Used
p.235
0:3
-
Multiple
-
-
p.234
0
1All
Set
-
p.237
-
Used
Set
Used
Fully
Multiple
Automatic
(E-TTL II Multiple
autoflash) Multiple
• Flash exposure
compensation
p.238
1All
0
1(A:B)
0+3
1All and 2
0+3
1(A:B)2
p.239
• FE lock
External Speedlite
A:B Flash
Quantity
Ratio
Manual
Flash
Built-in
Page
Flash
Single/
Multiple
-
-
Multiple
Set
-
Single/
Multiple
-
Multiple
Set
Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions
0
1All
0
1(A:B)
Used
0+3
1All and 2
Used
0+3
1(A:B)2
p.240
Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire in order
to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to
control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the
shooting conditions.
231
Easy Wireless Flash PhotographyN
The basics of easy, fully automatic wireless flash photography are
described below.
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash photography.
Therefore, these steps are omitted in
other wireless flash setups described
on the pages hereafter.
1
Press the <D> button to raise the
built-in flash.
 For wireless flash photography, be
sure to raise the built-in flash.
[Flash control].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
[Evaluative].
3 Select
 For [E-TTL II meter.], select
[Evaluative], then press <0>.
232
Easy Wireless Flash PhotographyN
[Built-in flash settings].
4 Select
 Select [Built-in flash settings], then
press <0>.
[EasyWireless].
5 Select
 For [Built-in flash], select
[EasyWireless], then press <0>.
[Channel].
6 Set
 Set the transmission channel (1-4) to
the same one as the slave unit.
the picture.
7 Take
 Set the camera and take the picture
in the same way as with normal flash
photography.
the wireless flash
8 Exit
photography.
 For [Built-in flash], select
[NormalFiring].
 Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
 Even if the firing of the built-in flash is disabled when [EasyWireless] is
set, it will still fire a small flash in order to control the slave unit.
Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control the slave unit
may appear in the picture.
 Test flash firing function is not available with the slave unit.
233
Easy Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite.
This is convenient when you need a large flash output.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Built-in flash
Channel
: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
: EasyWireless
: (Same as slave units)
All the slave units will be controlled to fire
at the same output and obtain a standard
exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.
Flash Exposure Compensation
If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash
exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.
 Select [1exp. comp.], then press
<0>.
 If the flash exposure is too dark,
press the <Z> key to increase the
flash output and make it brighter. If
the flash exposure is too bright, press
the <Y> key to decrease the flash
output and make it darker.
234
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
and Built-in Flash
This is fully automatic wireless flash
photography with one external Speedlite
and the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows cast on the
subject.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons indicate the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons indicate the built-in flash.
1
Select [CustWireless].
 Follow step 5 on page 233 to select
[CustWireless], then press <0>.
[Wireless func.].
2 Select
 For [Wireless func.], select
[0:3], then press <0>.
the desired flash ratio and
3 Set
take the picture.
 Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
 If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.158).
 The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop
increments) for the exposure level.
235
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be fired as one flash unit or separated
into slave groups for shooting with flash ratio control.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Wireless func.
Channel
: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
:0
: (Same as slave units)
[1All] Firing multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
Effective when you need a large flash
output. All the slave units will be
controlled to fire at the same output and
obtain a standard exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.
1 Set [Firing group] to [1All].
2 Take the picture.
236
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
[1(A:B)] Firing multiple slave units in multiple groups
A
You can divide the slave units into
groups A and B, and can change the
flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting
effect.
Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual and set one slave unit to firing
group A and the other to firing group B.
Position the Speedlites as shown in the
illustration.
B
1
Select [Wireless func.].
 Follow step 2 on page 235 to select
[0], then press <0>.
2 Set [Firing group] to [1(A:B)].
the A:B flash ratio and shoot.
3 Set
 Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
If [Firing group] is set to [1(A:B)], group C will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments) for the exposure level.
237
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and
Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to the wireless flash photography
described on pages 236-237.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
1
Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Wireless func.
Channel
: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
: [0+3]
: (Same as slave units)
[Firing group].
2 Select
 Select the firing group, then set the
flash ratio, flash exposure
compensation, and other necessary
settings before shooting.
A
[1All and 2]
238
B
[1(A:B)2]
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Flash Exposure Compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below) that
can be set vary depending on the [Wireless func.] and [Firing group]
settings.
[Flash exposure comp.]
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to the
built-in flash and all the external
Speedlites.
[2exp. comp.]
 Flash exposure compensation is
applied only to the built-in flash.
[1exp. comp.]
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to all
the external Speedlites.
FE lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to
perform FE lock.
239
Custom Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Setting the Flash Output Manually
for Wireless Flash Photography
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1flash output],
[Group A output], etc.) vary depending on the [Wireless func.] setting
(see below).
[Wireless func.: 0]
 [Firing group: 1All]
The manual flash output setting is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
 [Firing group: 1(A:B)]
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.
[Wireless func.: 0+3]
 [Firing group: 1All and 2]
The flash output can be set
separately for the external
Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.
 [Firing group: 1(A:B)2]
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.
You can also set the flash output for
the built-in flash.
240
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s
LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended in such cases.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.488) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
241
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <A> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor. In the <A> mode,
the scene icon for the scene detected
by the camera is displayed on the
upper left of the screen (p.247).
 The Live View image will be displayed
in the brightness level closely
matching that of the actual image to
be captured.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.259).
 You can also tap on the screen to
select the face or subject (p.269).
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <A> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with image-recording quality
set to JPEG 73 and aspect ratio set to 3:2).
 In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.423) for Live
View shooting.
242
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
3 Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z1]
tab in Basic Zone modes) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 310 shots
Approx. 270 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 270 shots
Approx. 230 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 2 hr. 25 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
Continuous Shooting Display
During Live View shooting, if you perform <o> high-speed
continuous shooting with One-Shot AF, keep holding down the shutter
button completely to display (play back) the captured images
continuously. When the continuous shooting ends (shutter button is
returned to halfway position), the Live View image will be displayed.
Depending on the shooting conditions such as when shooting with flash or
shooting long exposures, the captured images may not be displayed (played
back) continuously.
243
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 In the <8: x> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.
 In the <8: q> mode, the angle of view changes slightly in Live View
shooting because distortion correction is applied.
 In the <8: FG> and <v: ABCD> modes, the image area
will be smaller.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower (max. approx. 2.0 shots/sec.).
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 273-274.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be longer than with viewfinder shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.325). If
[52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (Camera power remains on.)
 With the HDMI cable, you can display the Live View image on a TV set
(p.369). Note that no sound will be output. If the picture does not appear
on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to
[For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV
set).
244
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Battery level
Maximum burst*
Possible shots
Shooting mode
Electronic level
AF point (Live 1-point AF)
Histogram display
Quick Control
White balance/
White balance
correction
AF method
AF operation
Drive mode
Picture Style
Metering mode
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Image-recording
quality
Creative filters
Bluetooth function
Wi-Fi function
Exposure
simulation
Touch shutter
AE lock
Shutter speed
Wi-Fi signal strength/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Aperture
Flash-ready/Flash off
Flash exposure compensation
Magnified view
AEB/FEB/Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Exposure level indicator/AEB range
* The number will be displayed when the maximum burst decreases to nine or
lower.
245
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.78). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
 You can display the histogram by pressing the <B> button. However,
the histogram is not displayed while pressing the shutter button
completely.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual
image to be captured.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
 The <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray (for your
reference) in the <8: FG> modes, when Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set, when flash is used, or when bulb exposure is used. The
histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light
conditions.
 The <g> icon will also be displayed in gray in the
<v: ABCD> modes. The histogram will not be displayed.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature
contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot
places.
246
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Portrait*1
Non-Portrait
Nature and
Movement
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene
Background
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
247
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image with
the effects of the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and
other shooting functions applied.
The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed
below. However, it may be slightly different from the resulting image.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.




White balance
White balance correction
Ambience-based shots (in <C> mode)
Background blur (in <C> mode)
* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when
[Simulating blur] is displayed).











Color tone (in <P> mode)
Brightness
Metering mode
Exposure
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)
248
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to Live View shooting are described here.
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, if you press the <Q> button with the image
displayed on the LCD monitor, you can set AF method, AF operation,
Drive mode, Metering mode, Image quality, White balance, Picture
Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Creative filters.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in the table on
pages 118-119 (except background blur) as well as the functions in bold
above.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function and Feature guide (p.63)
will appear on the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the function.
 In the <8> and <v> modes, select the shooting mode box
on the upper left of the screen, then press <0> to select the
shooting mode.
 To set Auto white balance, select [Q], then press <0>.
 To set the drive mode’s <q> setting, WB correction/WB
bracketing, Picture Style parameters, or Creative filter effects,
press the <B> button.
249
Shooting Function Settings
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press <0> or the <Q> button to
finalize the setting and return to Live
View shooting.
 You can also select [2] to return to
Live View shooting.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the
<g> button.
 When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering
circle will be displayed at the center of the screen.
250
U Shooting with Creative Filter EffectsN
While viewing the Live View image, you can apply one of seven filter
effects (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water
painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect) for shooting.
The camera saves only the image with the Creative filter applied. You
can also take a picture without a Creative filter, then apply an effect
afterward and save it as a new image (p.392).
the Mode Dial to a Creative
1 Turn
Zone mode.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[x].
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[x] (Creative filter) on the right side
of the screen.
a filter.
4 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
filter (p.253).
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
251
U Shooting with Creative Filter EffectsN
the filter effect.
5 Adjust
 Press the <B> button (except for
c).
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
the picture.
6 Take
 The image is shot with the filter effect
applied.
 When you set a Creative filter, single shooting will take effect even if the
drive mode is set to <o> or <i>.
 You cannot shoot with Creative filters if the recording quality is 1 or
1+73, or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set.
The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.
252
U Shooting with Creative Filter EffectsN
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands
the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the
image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF method will be
Live 1-point AF (fixed at center).
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant
noise.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
253
U Shooting with Creative Filter EffectsN
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that
makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the
color cast by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect.
If you want the image center to look sharp, take the picture without
changing any setting.
To move the area that looks sharp (miniature effect frame), see
“Adjusting Miniature Effect” (p.116). The AF method will be Live
1-point AF. Positioning the miniature effect frame over the AF point
before shooting is recommended.
 With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
 With the Soft focus and Miniature effect, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in
the picture. You can check the picture’s blurred effect by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
254
3 Menu Function Settings
When the camera is set for Live View
shooting, menu options exclusive to Live
View shooting will appear under the
[z6] tab (the [z2] tab in Basic Zone
modes).
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [Smooth zone], or [Live 1-point AF].
See pages 259-268 for the AF method.
 Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take
the picture automatically. For details, see page 269.
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 8 sec.
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Selecting [z4: Dust delete data] or either [Clean manually] or [Clean
nowf] under [54: Sensor cleaning] will stop the Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <A> button.
255
Changing the Autofocus OperationN
You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics to suit the
shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF
operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
the <Q> button.
1 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[X].
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[X] (AF operation) on the left
side of the screen.
the AF operation.
3 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired AF operation, then press
<0>.
X: One-Shot AF
K: Servo AF
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF operation.
 Settable only for Live View shooting (not settable for movie shooting).
 If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs,
the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed
completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see
“Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.266).
256
Changing the Autofocus OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper
will sound.
 The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the
picture.
 When the drive mode is set to <o> for high-speed continuous
shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 6.0
shots/sec.
 When the drive mode is set to <i> for low-speed continuous
shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 3.5
shots/sec.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower. Regardless of the <o> and <i> settings, the continuous
shooting speed will be the same (max. approx. 2.0 shots/sec.).
If [53: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
257
Changing the Autofocus OperationN
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold
down the shutter button halfway, the camera keeps focusing on
the subject continuously.
 When the drive mode is set to <o> for high-speed continuous
shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 4.5
shots/sec. The pictures will be taken with priority given to the
continuous shooting speed.
 When the drive mode is set to <i> for low-speed continuous
shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 3.5
shots/sec. The pictures will be taken with priority given to subject
tracking.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower. Regardless of the <o> and <i> settings, the continuous
shooting speed will be the same (max. approx. 2.0 shots/sec.).
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking], focusing will be
continuous as long as the Area AF frame can track the subject.
 Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s
speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
 Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first,
then recompose and shoot.
With Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
258
3 Focusing with AF
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking]
(p.260), [Smooth zone] (p.262), and [Live 1-point AF] (p.264).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.271).
Select the AF method.
 Under the [z6] tab (the [z2] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [AF
method].
 Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
 While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
<Q> button to select the AF method
on the Quick Control screen (p.249).
 The explanations on pages 260-264 assume that [AF operation] is set
to [One Shot AF] (p.257). With [Servo AF] (p.258) set, the AF point will
turn blue when focus is achieved.
 In the <5> and <8: C> modes, Servo AF is set automatically, and
when focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue and the beeper will
sound.
 Regarding the touch shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation),
see page 269.
259
3 Focusing with AF
u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Area AF frame
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <A> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Area AF frame will be displayed.
the AF point.
2 Check
 When a face is detected, the AF point
<p> will appear over the face to be
focused on.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use the <Y> <Z>
keys to move <q> over the face
you want to focus on.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
you tap on a subject other than a
human face, the AF point will be
switched to <z>.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 If no faces can be detected or if you
do not tap anything on the screen,
focus will be achieved within the Area
AF frame.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
260
3 Focusing with AF
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.242).
 Focusing on a subject other than a human face
If you press <0> or the <L> button, the AF point <z> will appear
at the center and you can use the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to
move the AF point. Once the AF point <z> achieves focus, it will
track the subject even if you change the composition or the subject
moves.
 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.271) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
 Use the Area AF frame as a guide, and focus within the Area AF frame.
 The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
261
3 Focusing with AF
Smooth Zone: o
The selected Zone AF frame is used to focus. The AF area is larger
than with [Live 1-point AF].
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <A> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Zone AF frame will be displayed.
Zone AF frame
the AF point.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a zone. To return to the
center zone, press <0> or the <L>
button.
 You can also touch the LCD monitor
screen to move the Zone AF frame.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the Zone AF frame over the
subject and press the shutter button
halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the Zone AF
frame will turn orange.
262
3 Focusing with AF
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.242).
263
3 Focusing with AF
Live 1-point AF: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
 Press the <A> button.
AF point
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
 During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], a larger
AF point will be displayed.
the AF point.
2 Move
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to move the AF point to where
you want to focus. (It cannot be
moved to the edge of the screen.)
 Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will return the AF point to the screen
center.
 You can also touch the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.242).
264
3 Focusing with AF
Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take
longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source
under which you are shooting.
 If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually (p.271).
 If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus,
recompose to move the subject (and AF point) toward the screen center,
focus again, then take the picture.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist as necessary.
 With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
265
3 Focusing with AF
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or points of light.
 The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the screen.
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
 Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
266
3 Focusing with AF
Magnified View
In the [Smooth zone] and [Live 1-point
AF] modes, either press the <u> button
or tap on [Y] displayed on the bottom
right of the screen. You can magnify the
image by approx. 5x or 10x and check
the focus.
Magnified view is not possible with
[u+Tracking].
 To move the AF point, press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys or tap
on the spot you want to magnify.
 Either press the <u> button or tap on [Y] to magnify the area
covered by the magnifying frame. Each time you press the <u>
button or tap on [Y], the magnification ratio changes.
 The magnifying frame will appear at the center of the Zone AF frame
when [Smooth zone] is set, and it will appear around the position of
the AF point when [Live 1-point AF] is set.
 At 100% (approx. 1x) magnification, press the <W> <X> or <Y>
<Z> keys or touch the screen to move the magnifying frame.
Pressing the <0> or <L> button will return the magnifying frame
to the screen center.
 When the image is magnified by approx. 5x or 10x, you can change
the magnified area by pressing the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys or
tapping on the triangle on the screen top, bottom, left, or right.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the normal view will
return for [Smooth zone]. For [Live 1-point AF], AF will proceed
with the magnified view.
 With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the
magnified view, the camera will return to the normal view for
focusing.
267
3 Focusing with AF
 If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
 If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
 AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
 When in magnified view, Movie Servo AF (p.315) will not function.
 With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
268
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <A> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the touch shutter.
2 Enable
 Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
 [x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
 [y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot (Touch AF).
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
on the screen to shoot.
3 Tap
 Tap on the face or subject on the
screen.
 On the point you tap, the camera will
focus with the AF method that was
set (p.259-264). When [Smooth
zone] is set, it will switch to [Live 1point AF].
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap on the face or subject
on the screen again.
269
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
 Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still
shoot in the single shooting mode.
 Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will
focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].
 Tapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
 If the Fish-eye effect Creative filter is set, the camera will focus using the
AF point at the center of the screen regardless of the point you tap on.
 If the Miniature effect Creative filter is set, the touch shutter does not
work.
 You can also set the touch shutter with [z6: Touch Shutter] (the [z2]
tab in Basic Zone modes).
 To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the
screen.
270
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
 You can also tap [1] on the screen to
magnify the image.
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
Magnifying frame
keys to move the magnifying frame to
where you want to focus.
 Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will return the magnifying frame to the
screen center.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification of the image will
change in the following sequence:
1x 9 5x 9 10x 9 Normal view
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification
271
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button to take the
picture (p.242).
 In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
 Even with manual focusing, you can use the touch shutter to take a
picture.
272
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with a high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
 If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In
magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be
captured with the image area of the normal view.
 If you use a TS-E lens (except the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L
II) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an extension tube, the
standard exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may
result.
273
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
 If the shutter speed is 1 sec. or slower, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD
monitor, and the Live View display will not appear until the exposure is
complete.
Custom Functions
 During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.401).
Lens and Flash
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
released in and after the second half of 2011.
 FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling
flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
274
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the power switch to
<k>.
 For cards that can record movies, see page 8.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. In such a case, using a
tripod is recommended.
 To shoot while handholding the camera, see page 88.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
275
k Shooting Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the
shot movies (p.369-371).
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to any mode other than <a>,
autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1
Set the power switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
the Mode Dial to a mode other
2 Set
than <8>, <v>, or <a>.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.259-268, 271).
 By default, [Movie Servo AF:
Enable] is set so that the camera
always keeps focusing. To stop Movie
Servo AF, see page 315.
the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the <A> button to start
Recording movie
Built-in microphones
276
shooting a movie. To stop movie
shooting, press the <A> button
again.
 While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphones.
k Shooting Movies
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 321-322.
 If necessary, also read “General Live View Shooting Cautions” on
pages 273-274.
 In Basic Zone modes (except the <8> and <v> modes), the
shooting result will be the same as with <A>. Also, the scene icon for
the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left (p.279).
 In the <f> and <s> shooting modes, the settings will be the same
as when shooting in the <d> mode.
 Settable menu functions differ between Basic Zone modes and Creative
Zone modes (p.450).
 Shutter speed, aperture and ISO speed are set automatically.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.208) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting will be displayed for the
number of seconds set with [z4: Metering timer]. After applying AE
lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S>
button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set the <R> switch downward and
turn the <5> dial to set the exposure compensation.
 If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed, aperture and
ISO speed will not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
 With autoexposure movie shooting (except in time-lapse movie shooting),
the camera will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under
low-light conditions. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light.
277
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, and <f> Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
The maximum limit varies depending on the [kISO Auto] setting
(p.320).
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set
to [1:On], [Max.:H(25600)] can also be selected for [kISO Auto].
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [1:Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO
12800.
When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the ISO
speed settings again before shooting movies.
278
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in Basic Zone modes (except the <8> and
<v> modes), an icon representing the scene detected by the camera
will be displayed, and the shooting will be performed to suit the scene.
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not
match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: • Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
• During time-lapse movie shooting, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed
even if a person is detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
279
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
In the <a> mode, you can manually set the shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot
movies is for advanced users.
1
Set the power switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
2 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the ISO speed.
3 SetPress
the <g> button and turn the
<6> or <5> dial to select the ISO
speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
<6> <5>
280
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter speeds
vary depending on the frame rate.
• 5 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/25 sec.
•6
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
•7
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/50 sec.
•8
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
k Shooting Movies
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure
Shooting” (p.276).
ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting
 With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 12800. The maximum limit varies depending on the
[kISO Auto] setting (p.320).
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 12800 in
whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if
you set [2: ISO expansion] to [1:On], the maximum limit of the
manual ISO speed setting range will be expanded so you can also
select H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [1:Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO
12800.
 Since shooting a movie at ISO 25600 equivalent may result in much
noise, it is designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
 When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
camera settings again before shooting movies.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 If you set [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn S)] with [14: Custom
Controls] under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] (p.409), you can use
exposure compensation with ISO Auto set.
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.282)
compared to when the <A> button is pressed.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
281
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
AF method
• c : u+Tracking
• o : Smooth zone
• d : Live 1-point AF
Movie shooting mode/
Scene icon
y : Autoexposure
(Basic Zone
modes)
k : Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
M : Manual exposure
u : HDR movie
l : Creative filters
N : Time-lapse
movie
Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time
Battery level
AF point (Live 1-point AF)
Quick Control
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Movie recording size
Frame rate
GPS connection
indicator
Digital zoom
Movie digital IS
Magnify/Digital
zoom
Video snapshot
Movie-recording format
Creative filters
Movie Servo AF
ISO speed
Wi-Fi function
Highlight tone priority
AE lock
Exposure level indicator
Wi-Fi signal strength/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Shutter speed
Bluetooth function
Wind filter: Disable
Aperture
* Applies to a single movie clip.
282
Exposure compensation
Recording level (manual)
Attenuator
k Shooting Movies
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.78).
 If the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera is connected to a
TV set with an HDMI cable (p.369), the electronic level cannot be
displayed.
 The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look
with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance and other
shooting functions applied.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.










White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
HDR movie
Creative filters
283
k Shooting Movies
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still
photos, stop the movie shooting and take still photos using viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens mechanical sound.
 If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image
may flicker.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.276) with your fingers,
etc.
 If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 321-322.
 If necessary, also read “General Live View Shooting Cautions” on
pages 273-274.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature
contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot
places.
284
k Shooting Movies
Notes for Movie Shooting
 Each time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [1920x1080]).
 You can also focus on the image by pressing the <p> button.
 Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones.
 If you connect the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.28), the
external microphone is given the priority.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the possible movie shooting
time will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 55 min. at room temperature (23°C /
73°F) and approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F) (with
movie recording size set to L6/5X and [z4: Movie Servo
AF: Disable] set).
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in
and after the second half of 2011.
285
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to movie shooting are described here.
Q Quick Control
If you press the <Q> button when the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor, you can set AF method, Movie rec. size, Digital zoom,
Movie digital IS, Video snapshot, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, and Creative filters.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.63) will appear
on the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
function.
 To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
 To set the WB correction, Picture
Style parameters, or Creative filters,
press the <B> button.
 Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
 You can also select [2] to return to
movie shooting.
286
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [z1: Movie rec. size], you can set
the movie recording size (image size,
frame rate, and compression method)
and other functions.
Movies will be recorded in the MP4
format.
 Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
x 640x480
Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.
 Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)
6 29.97 fps/8 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5 25.00 fps/7 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
4 23.98 fps
Mainly for motion pictures.
 The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL]. 4 (23.98 fps) can be selected only when [For NTSC] is set.
 If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording
size again.
287
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Compression method
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
Xv IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a low bit rate for playback on various
devices, the file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard).
Therefore, you can shoot longer than with IPB (Standard).
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording Size
87 Standard
L
[1920x 654 Standard
1080]
65
Light
w
[1280x
720]
87
65
Light
x
[640x
480]
65
Standard
65
Light
Standard
Total Recording Time on Card
4 GB
8 min.
17 min.
16 GB
35 min.
64 GB
(Approx.)
File Size
2 hr. 21 min. 431 MB/min.
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min. 216 MB/min.
43 min.
2 hr. 53 min. 11 hr. 35 min. 87 MB/min.
20 min.
1 hr. 21 min. 5 hr. 24 min. 184 MB/min.
2 hr. 5 min. 8 hr. 20 min. 33 hr. 22 min. 30 MB/min.
57 min.
3 hr. 50 min. 15 hr. 20 min. 66 MB/min.
2 hr. 43 min. 10 hr. 53 min. 43 hr. 32 min. 23 MB/min.
HDR Movie (p.291)
17 min.
Time-lapse movie (p.296)
5 min.
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min. 216 MB/min.
23 min.
1 hr. 33 min. 654 MB/min.
An increase in the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table above (p.321).
288
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
 Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will
format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you shoot a movie and the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
 Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will
format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds
4 GB during movie shooting, the movie will be saved as a single file
(rather than being split into multiple files).
Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If the
movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting will
stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by pressing
the <A> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new movie file.)
When downloading movie files exceeding 4GB to a computer, use either the
EOS Utility (p.488) or a card reader (p.492). Movie files exceeding 4GB will
not be downloaded if you perform image download with the function of the
computer’s operating system.
289
3 Using Movie Digital Zoom
When the recording size is L6/4 (NTSC) or L5 (PAL),
you can shoot with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom.
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <8> or <v>.
[Digital zoom].
2 Select
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Digital
zoom], then press <0>.
[Approx. 3-10x zoom].
3 Select
 Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom], then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to movie shooting.
digital zoom.
4 Use
 Press the <W> <X> keys.
 The digital zoom bar will appear.
 Press the <W> key to zoom in or
press the <X> key to zoom out.
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
[Live 1-point AF] (fixed at center).
 To cancel digital zoom, set [Disable]
in step 2.
Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Time-lapse movie, Movie digital IS and Creative filter cannot be set.
The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 6400.
Magnified view is not possible.
Since Movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will
look grainier at higher magnifications. Noise, dots of light, etc., may also
become noticeable.
 The scene icon will not be displayed.
 Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
266.





290
u Shooting HDR Movies
You can shoot movies by reducing the clipped highlight details of bright
areas even in high-contrast scenes.
The recording size is L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
2 Shoot an HDR movie.
 Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts
of the movie image may look distorted. During handheld shooting,
camera shake may make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a
tripod is recommended. Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting,
afterimages or noise may become more noticeable when the HDR movie
is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-motion compared to normal
playback.
 Movie digital zoom, video snapshot, time-lapse movie, and Movie digital
IS cannot be set.
291
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filter Effects
In the <v> (Creative filters) mode, you can shoot movies with one of
five filter effects (Dream, Old Movies, Memory, Dramatic B&W, and
Miniature effect movie).
The recording size can be set to L6/4 (NTSC) or L5
(PAL).
1
Set the Mode Dial to <v>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[l].
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[l] (Creative filters) on the upper left
of the screen, then press <0>.
a filter effect.
4 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
filter (p.293), then press <0> and
select [OK].
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
292
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filter Effects
the filter effect level.
5 Adjust
 Press the <Q> button and select the
icon below [Creative filters].
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
 When the Miniature effect movie is
set, select the playback speed.
6 Shoot the movie.
 Magnified view is not possible.
 The histogram is not displayed.
 Movie digital zoom, video snapshot, time-lapse movie, and Movie digital
IS cannot be set.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.
In Creative Zone modes, you can set Creative filters with Quick Control
(p.286).
Creative Filter Characteristics
 l Dream
Creates a soft, dreamy, otherworldly atmosphere. Gives the movie a
soft look overall, blurring the periphery of the screen. You can adjust
the blurry areas along the screen edges.
 m Old Movies
Creates an atmosphere like an old film by adding wavering,
scratches, and flickering effects to the image. The top and bottom of
the screen are masked in black. You can modify the wavering and
scratch effects by adjusting the filter effect.
293
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filter Effects
 k Memory
Creates the atmosphere of a distant memory. Gives the movie a soft
look overall, reducing brightness of the periphery of the screen. You
can modify the overall saturation and the dark areas along the
screen edges by adjusting the filter effect.
 n Dramatic B&W
Creates an atmosphere of dramatic realism with high-contrast black
and white. You can adjust the graininess and black-and-white effect.
 o Miniature effect movie
You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select
the playback speed and shoot.
If you want the image center to look sharp, take the picture without
changing any setting.
To move the area that looks sharp (miniature effect frame), see
“Adjusting Miniature Effect” (p.116). The AF method will be Live
1-point AF. Positioning the miniature effect frame over the AF point
before shooting is recommended. During shooting, AF point or
miniature effect frame will not be displayed.
In step 5, set the playback speed to [5x], [10x], or [20x] and shoot.
Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)
294
Speed
Playback Length
5x
Approx. 12 sec.
10x
Approx. 6 sec.
20x
Approx. 3 sec.
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filter Effects
<o> (Miniature Effect Movies)
 Sound will not be recorded.
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 Miniature effect movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec.
cannot be edited (p.364).
295
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Images shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to
create a movie file. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in
a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It is effective
for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing plants, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in the MOV format and in L6W
(NTSC) or L5W (PAL) recording size.
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <8> or <v>.
[Time-lapse movie].
2 Select
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Timelapse movie] and press <0>.
3 Select [Enable].
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or
an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or
the camera’s internal components.
296
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval and
4 Set
number of shots.
 Check the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] displayed at the
bottom of the screen to set the
shooting interval and number of shots.
 Set the shooting interval
Playback
Time required
(hours:minutes:seconds) with
time
[Interval].
 Set the number of shots with [No. of shots].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 After completing the settings, select [OK] to return to the previous
screen.
 Shooting Interval
Settable in the range from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 Number of shots
Settable in the range from [0002] to [3600]. Set one digit at a time. If
3600 is set, the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC
and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. for PAL.
the exposure.
5 Set
 Select [Auto exposure] and set.
 Fixed 1st frame
The second and subsequent frames will also be shot with the same
exposure and other shooting function settings as the first frame.
 Each frame
Each frame will be shot with the exposure adjusted to match the
brightness of the scene. Note that function settings such as Picture
Style and white balance will automatically be set for each frame
when they are set to [Auto].
297
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
whether to turn off the LCD
6 Set
monitor automatically.
 Select [LCD auto off] and set.
 Disable
The Live View image will remain displayed during shooting. Note
that the LCD monitor will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after
the shooting started.
 Enable
The LCD monitor will turn off approx. 10 sec. after shooting the first
frame.
You can press the <B> button to turn off or on the LCD monitor during
shooting.
the beeper for shooting.
7 Set
 Select [Beep as img taken] and set.
 If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
8 Check the settings.
Time required
Playback
time
If [53: Beep] is set to [Disable], the setting in step 7 cannot be set.
298
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
 Playback time
Indicates the recording time (time required to play back the movie)
when shooting with the set intervals to create the movie in
“L 6 W (NTSC)” or “L 5 W (PAL)” format.
the menu.
9 Exit
 Press the <M> button to turn off
the menu screen.
the time-lapse movie.
10 Shoot
 Press the shutter button halfway to
Shots remaining
Time-lapse movie
check the focus and exposure.
 Press the <A> button to start timelapse movie shooting.
 AF will not work during time-lapse
movie shooting.
 During time-lapse movie shooting,
<p> will blink on the LCD panel.
 Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the reflex mirror and
shutter make no mechanical sound
during time-lapse movie shooting.
 When the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
will stop and be automatically
canceled.
299
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting, press the <A> button. (The
setting will be switched to [Disable].) The time-lapse movie shot so far
will be recorded on the card.
 You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
 If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
 Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
 If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet
accessories (sold separately, p.422) is recommended.
 With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z1: Movie rec.
size] or [53: Video system].
 Time-lapse movie shooting cannot be set when Movie digital zoom,
Movie digital IS, Video snapshot or Creative filter is set, or when Wi-Fi
connection is established.
 If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an
HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 Regarding the settable shutter speed for manual exposure, see page
280.
 With [Interval] set to 3 sec. or less and [Auto exposure] set to [Each
frame], if the brightness of the subject is significantly different from that
for the last shot frame, shooting may not be performed with the set
interval.
 If the image is displayed on the LCD monitor during time-lapse movie
shooting, the Live View image will freeze momentarily at the time of
shooting.
 Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or
the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
300
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.
Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function
settings, play back images, etc.
 Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
 If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
 If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the
shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
 If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
 If the card has no available capacity, “remaining number of possible
shots” will be displayed in red as [z 0000], and you will not be able to
shoot.
 If you connect the camera to a computer with an interface cable and use
EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If
it is set to [Enable], the camera cannot communicate with the computer.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not
operate.
 If the power switch is set to <2>, time-lapse movie shooting will be
terminated and the setting will be switched to [Disable].
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting
is switched to [Disable] with the following operations:
• Performing [53: Sensor cleaning] or performing [Clear all camera
settings] under [54: Clear settings].
 When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared
automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting.
301
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can shoot time-lapse movies with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17
as shown in the table below (approx. time from start of shooting until the
battery becomes exhausted). The possible shooting time will vary
depending on the shooting conditions.
Total Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting
LCD Monitor
Room Temperature Low Temperatures
During Shooting
(23°C / 73°F)
(0°C / 32°F)
Turned on
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min.
Approx. 2 hr.
Turned off
Approx. 3 hr. 30 min. Approx. 3 hr. 20 min.
* When shooting interval is set to [00:00:03]
You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.423) or
Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.426) to start and stop the timelapse movie shooting. Set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable] beforehand.
• When Using BR-E1
Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position, then
press the release button.
• When Using RC-6
See the table below.
Operation Status with RC-6
Camera Status/
<o> (Immediate
<2> (2-sec. delay)
Remote Control Setting
shooting)
302
Shooting-ready
Starts shooting
During time-lapse movie
shooting
Ends shooting
Operates according
to the [V btn
function] setting
(p.317)
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec.,
4 sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be
joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You
can thereby show short and quick highlights of a trip or event.
A video snapshot album can also be played back together with
background music (p.310, 368).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <8> or <v>.
[Video snapshot].
2 Select
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Video
snapshot] and press <0>.
3 Select [Enable].
303
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
4 Select [Album settings].
5 Select [Create a new album].
the snapshot length.
6 Select
 Press <0> and use the <W> <X>
keys to select the snapshot’s length,
then press <0>.
[OK].
7 Select
 Press the <M> button to exit the
Shooting duration
304
menu.
 A blue bar will appear to indicate the
snapshot length.
 Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.305).
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
8 Shoot
 Press the <A> button, then shoot.
 The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
 The confirmation screen will appear
(p.306-307).
as a video snapshot album.
9 Save
 Select [J Save as album], then
press <0>.
 The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
to shoot more video
10 Continue
snapshots.
 Repeat step 8 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
 Select [J Add to album], then press
<0>.
 To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album].
 Repeat step 10 as necessary.
the video snapshot shooting.
11 Exit
 Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu, and return to the normal movie
shooting.
305
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 9 and 10
Function
Description
J Save as album (Step 9)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
J Add to album (Step 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
added to the album recorded immediately
before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 10)
A new video snapshot album is created and
the movie clip is saved as the first video
snapshot. The new album will be a different
file from the previously recorded album.
1 Playback video snapshot
(Step 9 and 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
played back. For playback operations, see the
table on the next page.
r Do not save to album
(Step 9)
r Delete without saving to
album (Step 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
erased instead of being saved to the album.
Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
If you want to shoot another video snapshot
right after shooting one video snapshot, set
[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This
setting will allow you to immediately shoot the
next video snapshot without the confirmation
screen appearing after you shoot each time.
306
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 9 and 10
Function
Playback Description
7 Play
By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video
snapshot recorded immediately before.
5 First frame
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
P Skip backward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
O Skip forward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
4 Last frame
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.362).
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous
screen.
* With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to
the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or
8 sec.).
307
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
 Follow step 5 on page 304 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
an existing album.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
existing album, then press <0>.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
 The video snapshot shooting screen
will appear.
the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
 See “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.305) to shoot the video
snapshot.
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
308
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
 You can add to an album only the video snapshots with the same
duration (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
 Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size].
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto]/[Manual] to [Disable]
or from [Disable] to [Auto]/[Manual].
• Updating the firmware.
 The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
309
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Playing Back an Album
You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal
movie (p.362).
1
Play back the movie.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
the album.
2 Select
 In the single-image display, the
[st] icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a video
snapshot album.
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
album.
back the album.
3 Play
 Press <0>.
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
Background Music
 You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.363, 368). To play
background music, you must first copy the background music to the card
using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the
background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
 Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
310
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.
1
Select [X].
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [X] (Edit), then
press <0>.
 The editing screen will be displayed.
an editing operation.
2 Select
 Select an editing option, then press
<0>.
Function
Description
T Move snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>
<Z> keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.
L Delete snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will
be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing
<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will
disappear.
7 Play snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to play, then press <0>.
311
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
the edited album.
3 Save
 Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen
bottom.
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new album, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original album, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
312
3 Menu Function Settings
When the power switch is set to <k>, the [z1], [z4], and [z5] tabs
will be displayed as the menu options exclusive to movie shooting (the
[z1], [z2], and [z3] tabs in Basic Zone modes).
z1
z4
z5
z1
 Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
compression method). For details, see page 287.
 Digital zoom
You can use digital zoom for telephoto shooting. For details, see
page 290.
 Sound recordingN
Level meter
Normally, the built-in microphones will
record the sound in stereo. If the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
(sold separately) is connected to the
camera’s external microphone IN
terminal (p.28), the external microphone
will be given priority.
313
3 Menu Function Settings
[Sound rec./Rec. level] options
[Auto]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.
Auto level control will operate automatically in
response to the sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the soundrecording level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and press the <Y> <Z> keys
while looking at the level meter to adjust the soundrecording level. Look at the peak hold indicator
(approx. 3 sec.), and adjust so that the level meter
sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
[Wind filter]
When set to [Auto], it reduces wind noise when there is wind
outdoors. This feature works only when you use the built-in
microphones for movie shooting. When the wind filter function
takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.
[Attenuator]
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises.
Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting,
sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In
such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
If you use the Wi-Fi (wireless communication) function with an external
microphone, the sound noise may be recorded. During sound recording,
using the wireless communication function is not recommended.
 In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On]/[Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take
effect.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 For both L and R, audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
314
3 Menu Function Settings
 Lens aberration correctionN
You can set peripheral illumination correction and chromatic
aberration correction. For details, see page 179.
 Lens electronic MFN
When a lens equipped with an electronic manual focusing function is
used, see page 128.
z4
 Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
 The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
 If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or if you do not
want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows.
• Tap [Z] on the screen’s bottom left.
• Press the <D> button.
• If you assign a button to [AF stop] with [14: Custom Controls]
under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], you can pause Movie
Servo AF while holding that button down. When you let go of the
button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
 When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or
changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
When [Disable] is set:
 Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
315
3 Menu Function Settings
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
266.
 Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery power and
shorten the possible movie shooting time (p.288).
 With certain lenses, the mechanical sound for focusing may be recorded.
If this happens, using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) may reduce the lens mechanical sound in the movie. Also,
using certain USM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM) or certain STM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS
STM) will reduce the lens mechanical sound to be recorded.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
 If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie
Servo AF, first set the camera’s power switch to <1>.
 AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 259-268. You
can select [u+Tracking], [Smooth zone], or [Live 1-point AF].
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
316
3 Menu Function Settings
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed on the LCD monitor during movie
shooting.
 V button function
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
Setting
Pressing halfway
a/-
Metering and AF
Pressing completely
No function
q/-
Metering only
No function
a/k
Metering and AF
Starts/stops movie
shooting
q/k
Metering only
Starts/stops movie
shooting
If [a/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <A> button, you
can start or stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately,
p.427).
During movie shooting, the [V btn function] setting overrides any function
assigned to the shutter button with [14: Custom Controls] under [54:
Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
317
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
 Video snapshot
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 303.
 Time-lapse movie
You can shoot time-lapse movies. For details, see page 296.
 Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.423) or Remote
Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.426).
• When Using BR-E1
Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position,
then press the release button.
• When Using RC-6
Set the switch to the <2> position, then press the transmit button. If
the switch is set to <o> (immediate release), the [V btn
function] setting will be applied.
318
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake
during movie shooting. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With
Movie digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens
without Image Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical
Image Stabilizer, Movie digital IS will function when the lens’s Image
Stabilizer switch is set to <1>.
Disable (v)
: Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is
disabled.
Enable (w)
: Camera shake will be corrected. The image will
be slightly magnified.
Enhanced (y) : Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger
camera shake can be corrected. The image will
be more magnified.
 Movie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Imager Stabilizer
switch is set to <2> (tu).
 With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS
will not function.
 Movie digital IS cannot be set in the <8> or <v> mode, or when
Movie digital zoom, time-lapse movie or Creative filter is set.
 The wider the angle of view, the more effective the image stabilization
will be. The narrower the angle of view, the less effective the image
stabilization will be.
 When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie
digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
 In magnified view, the effect of Movie digital IS will not be reflected in the
image displayed on the screen.
 Since the image is magnified in Movie digital IS, the image will look
grainier. Noise, dots of light, etc., may also become noticeable.
 Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects
of the Movie digital IS.
 When Movie digital IS is set, the size of AF points will also change.
 When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
 Certain lenses do not support this function. For details, refer to the Canon
website.
319
3 Menu Function Settings
ISO Speed During Movie ShootingN
You can set the ISO speed separately for still photo shooting and movie
shooting. Set under the [z2] tab.
 [kISO speed]
In manual exposure, you can set the ISO
speed (p.281).
 [kISO Auto]
You can set the maximum limit of the
automatic ISO speed for ISO Auto to ISO
6400 or ISO 12800.
Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)],
if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:On],
you can select [Max.:H(25600)].
320
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will
appear.
 The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphones will also record the operation sound
and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Using the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may reduce
these sounds in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the
movie image may freeze temporarily. In such a case, shoot movies with
manual exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV/MP4 format).
321
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
Indicator
will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Playback and TV Connection
 If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.369) and shoot a movie, the TV
set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound
will be properly recorded.
Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally, the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
 Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
 When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
322
9
Handy Features
Disabling the Beeper (p.324)
Card Reminder (p.324)
Setting the Image Review Time (p.325)
Setting the Auto Power Off Time (p.325)
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.326)
Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.327)
File Numbering Methods (p.329)
Setting the Copyright Information (p.332)
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.334)
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.335)
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically
(p.338)
 Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.339)
 Appending Dust Delete Data (p.341)
 Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.343)











323
Handy Features
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer shooting, and during touch operations.
Under the [53] tab, select [Beep], then
press <0>. Select [Disable], then
press <0>.
To silence the beeper only for touch
operations, select [Touch n].
3 Card Reminder
This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Release
shutter without card], then press
<0>. Select [Disable], then press
<0>.
If there is no card inserted in the camera
and you press the shutter button, “Card”
will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel, and you cannot release
the shutter.
324
Handy Features
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can change how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after shooting. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed
immediately after shooting. If [Hold] is set, the image review will be
displayed up until the [Auto power off] time has elapsed.
Note that during image review, if you operate any camera controls such
as pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
3 Setting the Auto Power Off Time
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set time
of idle operation elapses. When the camera is turned off due to auto
power off, you can turn it on again by pressing the shutter button, etc.
If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the <B>
button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off after the
camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. To turn on the LCD monitor
again, press the <B> button.
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power
off], then press <0>. Select the desired
setting, then press <0>.
If [10 sec/30 sec] is set, the camera will turn off after it is left idle for approx.
10 sec. When setting functions or during Live View shooting, movie
shooting, image playback, etc., the auto power off time will be approx. 30
sec.
325
Handy Features
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
view.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>. Press
the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the
brightness on the adjustment screen,
then press <0>.
When checking the exposure of an
image, set the LCD monitor brightness to
4 and prevent the ambient light from
affecting the image.
326
Handy Features
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Select folder].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
[Create folder].
2 Select
 Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.
a new folder.
3 Create
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
327
Handy Features
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.331) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to
999. The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lowercase letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space
cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same
three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”),
even if the last five characters in each name are different.
328
Handy Features
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
In [File numbering] under the [51] tab,
select [Numbering], then press <0>.
The available settings are described
below. Select the option, then press
<0>.
 [Continuous]: When you wish to continue the file numbering
sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is
created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when
you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to
9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a
computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
Card-1
100
0051
0052
0051
101
0052
Next sequential file number
329
Handy Features
 [Auto reset]: When you wish to restart the file numbering from
0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering
restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you
want to organize images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering
starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
Card-1
100
0051
0001
File numbering is reset
330
0051
101
0001
Handy Features
 [Manual reset]: When you wish to reset the file numbering to
0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.
In [File numbering] under the [51] tab,
select [Manual reset], then select [OK]
on the confirmation dialog.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the
images taken yesterday and the ones taken today. After the manual
reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset. (There
will be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.
331
Handy Features
3 Setting the Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the
image as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the item to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>


Character palette
Input mode


keys to move the n and select the
desired character. Then press <0>
to enter it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
By selecting [E], you can
change the input mode.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The information is saved.
332
Handy Features
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can
delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
 If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
 You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(EOS software, p.488).
333
Handy Features
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated
automatically to the proper orientation for viewing,
so they will not be displayed in horizontal orientation
when played back on the camera’s LCD monitor or
viewed on a computer screen. You can change the
setting of this feature.
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],
then press <0>. The available settings
are described below. Select the option,
then press <0>.
 [OnzD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during
playback on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the
computer screen.
 [OnD]
: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the
computer screen.
 [Off]
: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
FAQ
 The vertical image is not rotated during the image review just
after shooting.
Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the rotated image.
 [OnzD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto
rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera
is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for
playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 352.
 On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image
captured when [OnD] had been set.
Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.
 The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.
The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use EOS
software instead.
334
Handy Features
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone
modes.
1
Select [Clear settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear
settings], then press <0>.
[Clear all camera settings].
2 Select
 Select [Clear all camera settings],
then press <0>.
[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the default
settings as shown on pages 336-337.
FAQ
 Clearing all camera settings
After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]
in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings
(p.400).
Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the settings for [14:
Custom Controls] under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] will remain
unchanged.
335
Handy Features
Shooting Function Settings
Image Recording Settings
<8> mode
q (Group Photo)
Image quality
<v> mode
G (Grainy B/W)
Aspect ratio
3:2
AF operation
One-Shot AF
Picture Style
Auto
Standard
AF area selection mode Auto selection AF
73
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Metering mode
q (Evaluative metering)
Lens aberration correction
zISO speed
AUTO (Auto)
zISO Auto
Maximum 6400
Exposure compensation/AEB Canceled
Peripheral illumination
Enable
correction
Flash exposure compensation Canceled
Chromatic aberration
Enable
correction
Red-eye reduction
Disable
Distortion correction Disable
Interval timer
Disable
Diffraction correction Enable
Bulb timer
Disable
Anti-flicker shooting Disable
Viewfinder display
Lens electronic MF
Disable after
One-Shot AF
White balance
Q Auto:
Ambience priority
Electronic level
Hide
Grid display
Hide
Custom White Balance Canceled
Flicker detection
Show
White balance shift
Canceled
Unchanged
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Enable
Color space
sRGB
Long exposure
noise reduction
Disable
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Standard
Custom Functions
Flash control
Flash firing
E-TTL II flash metering Evaluative flash metering
Flash sync. speed
Auto
in Av mode
File numbering
Continuous
Shooting screen
Display Level Settings
Standard
Auto cleaning
Enable
Menu display
Standard
Dust Delete Data
Erased
Mode guide
Enable
Feature guide
Enable
336
Handy Features
Camera Settings
Auto power off
10 sec/30 sec
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View shooting Enable
Beep
AF method
Release shutter
without card
Enable
Enable
u+Tracking
AF operation
X
Touch Shutter
Disable
Image review time
2 sec.
Metering timer
8 sec.
AF point display
Disable
Grid display
Off
Histogram display
Brightness
Image jump w/6
e (10 images)
Creative filters
Disable
Auto rotate
OnzD
LCD brightness
Movie Shooting Settings
<v> mode
l (Dream)
LCD auto off
Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Movie Servo AF
Enable
Language
Unchanged
Video system
Unchanged
Touch control
Standard
Movie recording
size
NTSC:
L6 (Standard)
PAL:
L5 (Standard)
Digital zoom
Disable
z button display All items
options
selected
Multi function lock
5 (Quick
Control Dial) only
Copyright information Unchanged
Control over HDMI
kISO speed
AUTO (Auto)
kISO Auto
Maximum 12800
Sound recording
Auto
Disable
Wind filter
Auto
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
Attenuator
Disable
Configure: MY MENU Unchanged
Menu display
Normal display
Wireless communication settings
Wi-Fi
Disable
Bluetooth function Disable
Grid display
Off
V button function a/Video snapshot
Disable
Time-lapse movie
Disable
Remote control shooting Disable
Movie digital IS
Disable
Creative filters
Disable
 For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 400.
 For wireless communication settings, refer to the Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Function Instruction Manual.
337
Handy Features
3 Disabling the Auto Turn Off of the LCD Monitor
You can prevent the display-off sensor from turning off the LCD monitor
when your eye approaches the viewfinder.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD auto
off], then press <0>. Select [Disable],
then press <0>.
When Angle Finder C (sold separately) is attached to the viewfinder, set it to
[Disable]. If [Enable] is set, the LCD monitor may remain off.
338
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit is activated to automatically shake off any dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or can
disable this unit as follows.
Activating the Sensor Cleaning Manually
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The screen will indicate that the sensor
is being cleaned. (A small sound may
be heard.) Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter during
the cleaning, no picture is taken.
When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [Clean nowf] cannot be
selected.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
 Dots of light may appear on images if the sensor is affected by cosmic
rays, etc. By selecting [Clean nowf], their appearance may be
suppressed (p.466).
339
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor will no longer be cleaned when you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>.
340
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where
visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the
image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.488) to erase the dust
spots automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (u). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 When you select [OK] and press
<0>, the automatic sensor cleaning
will be performed, then a message
will appear. Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter
during the cleaning, no picture is
taken.
341
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm




(0.7 ft. - 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with
a patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
Select [OK] and the menu will
reappear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it
again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to
erase dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with EOS software.
342
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean manually].
2 Select
 Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.
[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
up and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately, p.422) is
recommended.
343
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [Clean manually] cannot be
selected.
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air
may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
344
10
Image Playback
This chapter describes advanced usage of the playback
methods described in Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and
Image Playback,” how to play back and erase the
captured images (still photos/movies), how to view them
on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
345
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
1
Play back the image.
 When you press the <x> button,
the last image captured will be
displayed.
to the index display.
2 Switch
 Press the <I> button.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Pressing the <I> button will
switch the display as follows: 9
images 9 36 images 9 100 images.
 Pressing the <u> button will switch
the display as follows: 100 images 9
36 images 9 9 images 9 4 images
9 1 image.




an image.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to move the
orange frame and select the image.
You can also press the <W> <X> or
<Y> <Z> keys to select the image.
 Turning the <6> dial will display
image(s) on the next or previous
screen.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
346
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the jump
method, then press <0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
r: Jump images by the specified
number
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
s: Display protected images only
k: Display by image rating (p.353)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
 With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the <6>
dial to select the number of images you want to jump (1 to 100).
 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
 If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
347
x Searching for Images Quickly
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse by the set method.
Jump method
Playback position
348
u/y Magnifying Images
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnify the image.
 Press the <u> button during image
playback.
 The image will be magnified.
 If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
 Press the <I> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.
Magnified area position
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to scroll the magnified image in
the direction pressed.
 To exit magnified view, press the
<x> button and the single-image
display will reappear.
 Turn the <5> dial to view another image while maintaining the
magnified view.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
349
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button
to play back images.
Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
 With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image, or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
 With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
screen by swiping your finger up or
down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left or
right, you can jump through images with
the method set in [Image jump w/6]
under the [x2] tab.
Touch operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible while
playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.369).
350
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
 Each time you pinch your fingers, the
single-image display will change to
the index display.
 When you select an image, the orange
frame will appear. Tap on the image
again to display it as a single image.
Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
 As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
 The image can be magnified up to
approx. 10x.
Double-tap.
 When you double-tap on the image
with your finger, the recorded image’s
pixels will be displayed at approx.
100% centered around the point that
you tapped on.
 To return to the single-image display,
double-tap on the image again.
In the index display, you cannot magnify the image by double-tapping.
 You can scroll around the image by dragging your fingers.
 To reduce the image, pinch your fingers together on the screen.
 By tapping on [2], you can return to the single-image display.
351
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.346).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.334) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
352
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
Rating a Single Image
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
the image to be rated.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be rated, then press <0>.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
the image.
4 Rate
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating.
 When you append a rating mark for
the image, the number beside the set
rating will increase by one.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
353
3 Setting Ratings
Specifying the Range
You can specify the range of images to rate all the images in the range at
once.
1
Select [Select range].
 Select [Select range] in [x2:
Rating], then press <0>.
the range of images.
2 Specify
 Select the first image, then press
<0>.
 Select the last image, then press
<0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the
selected images.
 To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
 To return to the previous screen,
press the <M> button.
the range.
3 Confirm
 Press the <Q> button.
the image.
4 Rate
 Turn the <6> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
354
3 Setting Ratings
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [x2:
Rating], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be specified.
Turn the <6> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
To cancel the rating, select the [OFF]
rating mark.
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
1000 or more images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [x2: Image jump w/6], you can display only the images having
a specific rating.
 Depending on the computer’s operating system, you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided, standard
image viewer (JPEG images only).
355
3 Setting Image Search Conditions
You can search for images by specifying the conditions and display the
filtered images. You can also play back in a slide show, protect, or erase
all the found images at once.
1
Select [Set image search
conditions].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Set
image search conditions], then
press <0>.
the search conditions.
2 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the condition.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
setting.
 To cancel the condition, press the
<B> button.
 You can even set all the conditions.
 To cancel all the conditions, press the
<L> button.
Condition
Description
MRating
Images with the selected rating mark will be displayed.
dDate
Images taken on the selected shooting date will be
displayed.
nFolder
Images in the selected folder will be displayed.
JProtect
“Protected” or “Unprotected” images on the card will be
displayed.
fType of file
Image files of the selected type will be displayed.
The settable file types are [z Stills], [z (RAW)],
[z (RAW, RAW+JPEG)], [z (RAW+JPEG)],
[z (RAW+JPEG, JPEG)], [z (JPEG)], and [k Movies].
356
3 Setting Image Search Conditions
the search conditions.
3 Implement
 Press <0>.
 Read the message that appears and
select [OK].
the found images.
4 Display
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Images that match the set conditions
will appear in a yellow frame.
If there are no images that match the condition, [OK] cannot be selected in
step 2 even if you press <0>. (You cannot proceed to step 3.)
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [4 min.] or less, the auto power off
time will be approx. 6 min. when the search conditions screen is
displayed.
 With the found images displayed, you can also perform operations
(protect, erase, print order, photobook set-up, rating, and slide show) for
all the found images at once.
 The display of found images will be automatically canceled with the
following operations:
• Shooting is performed.
• Auto power off takes effect.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Formatting the SD card.
• An image is added (e.g., an existing image is saved as a new image
after applying a filter effect to it, resizing it, or cropping it).
• When there are no longer any images matching the search conditions.
357
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [U: Creative
filters], [S: Resize (JPEG images only)], [N: Cropping], [T: AF point
display], [e: Image jump w/6], [t: Image search], and [q: Send
images to smartphone*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if [Wi-Fi] under [51: Wireless communication settings] is set
to [Disable].
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.
an item and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
 The name and setting of the selected
function are displayed at the bottom
of the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
function.
 For Protect images (p.372) and
Rating (p.353), press <B> to
select multiple images.
 For Creative filters (p.392), Resize
(p.395), Cropping (p.397), Image
search (p.356), and Send images to
smartphone, press <0> and set the
function.
 Image jump w/6: To set Jump
images by the specified number or
Rating (p.353), press <B>.
 To cancel, press the <M> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit Quick
Control.
358
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display, and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
359
k Enjoying Movies
The three main ways to play back and enjoy movies are as follows:
Playback on a TV Set (p.369)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with an HDMI cable, you can play back
the camera’s movies and still photos on
the TV set.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
 Movies cannot be played back on devices that do not support MOVformat or MP4-format movie files.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.362-368)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
360
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
back or edited with pre-installed or
general-purpose software compatible
with the movie’s recording format.
To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format and MP4-format movies. For details
on commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
361
k Playing Back Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played back.
 In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the upper
left indicates a movie. If the movie is a
video snapshot, <st> will be
displayed.
 In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 Play
 Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
 The movie will start playing back.
 You can pause the playback by
pressing <0>.
 You can adjust the sound volume
during movie playback by turning the
<6> dial.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
362
k Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <Y> <Z>
keys. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
v Background
music*
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(p.368).
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.364).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.362).
32
Press the <M> button to return to the single-image
display.
* When background music is set, the movie sound will not be played back.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 2 hr. 50 min.
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play a movie (p.369), adjust the
sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not change
the sound volume.)
363
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] at the center of the
screen.
 The movie will start playing back.
 To display the movie playback panel,
tap <s1> on the upper left of the
screen.
 To pause the movie while it is playing
back, tap on the screen. The movie
playback panel will also appear.
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to see the
previous or next frames. Keep holding
down the key to fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top is what will remain.
364
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the edited part, go back to
step 2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [Z] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
 Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
365
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can automatically play back all the images on the card one after
another.
1
Number of images
to be played back
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
[Set up] as desired.
2 Configure
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
 See page 368 for the background
music selection procedure.
 After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
366
[Display time]
[Repeat]
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
the slide show.
3 Start
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
4 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the
<M> button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping on the
screen.
 During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to switch the
still photo display format (p.121).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may differ depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 369.
 While viewing images in filtered playback with [x2: Set image search
conditions], you can play them back in a slide show.
367
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Selecting the Background Music
After you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to copy background music to
the card, you can play background music together with the slide show.
1
Select [Background music].
 Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
 If the card has no background music,
you cannot perform step 2.
the background music.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
the background music.
3 Play
 To listen to a sample of the
background music, press the <B>
button.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to play
another background music track. To
stop listening to the background
music, press the <B> button
again.
 Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
 To delete a background music track,
press the <W> <X> keys and select
the track, then press the <L> button.
At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music. For
the procedure to copy background music to a card, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
368
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play
the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI cable,
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected TV set.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 362.
369
Viewing Images on a TV Set
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not display the images due to incompatibility.
3 Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Select [Ctrl over HDMI].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the camera to a TV set.
3 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does not
switch automatically, use the TV set’s
remote control to select the HDMI IN
port the cable is connected to.
the camera’s <x> button.
4 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.
370
Viewing Images on a TV Set
an image.
5 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback
menu
the remote control’s Enter
6 Press
button.
Movie playback menu
2 : Return
a : 9-image index
1 : Play movie
y : Slide show
B : Display shooting info
b : Rotate
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
 Press the remote control’s /
button to select the desired option,
then press the Enter button.
 If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
 Certain TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection.
For details, refer to the TV set’s Instruction Manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not be able
to be operated properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to
[Disable], and use the camera to control the playback operation.
371
K Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the
camera’s erase function.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
Image protection icon
the image to be protected.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image on the
index display (p.346).
the image.
4 Protect
 Press <0> to protect the image. The
<K> icon will appear.
 To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
372
K Protecting Images
3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
You can specify the range of images to protect all the images in the
range at once.
1
Select [Select range].
 Select [Select range] in [x1:
Protect images], then press <0>.
the range of images.
2 Specify
 Select the first image, then press
<0>.
 Select the last image, then press
<0>.
 The images will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear.
 To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
 To return to the previous screen,
press the <M> button.
373
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.74), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.377), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary
images at once.
374
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.372) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing an image shot in
RAW+JPEG will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase
them all at once.
1
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
375
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
 A checkmark <X> will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
 To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the images.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The selected images will be erased.
376
L Erasing Images
3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Erased
You can specify the range of images to erase all the images in the
range at once.
1
Select [Select range].
 Select [Select range] in [31: Erase
images], then press <0>.
the range of images.
2 Specify
 Select the first image, then press
<0>.
 Select the last image, then press <0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the
selected images.
 To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
 To return to the previous screen, press
the <M> button.
the images.
3 Erase
 Press the <L> button.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog, then press <0>.
 The selected images will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When [31:
Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.74).
377
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded
on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image
selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one
batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the
images specified for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each
image.)
3 Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
You can send images to a Wi-Fi compatible printer supporting PictBridge
(Wireless LAN) and print them. For details, refer to the Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Function Instruction Manual.
378
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
[Print type]
K Standard
Print type
Date
File number
L Index
[Date]
[File No.]
Prints one image on one sheet.
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
L
On
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured
image.
Off
On
[On] imprints the file number.
Off
the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Multiple], or [All images] to order the
images to be printed.
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified for printing.
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order
specifications are set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you
extract just the images from the card for printing.
 Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images that have a
print order that was set by a different camera. All the print orders may be
overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible,
depending on the image type.
379
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
3 Specifying Images for Printing
 Selecting Images
Select and specify the images one by
one.
By pressing the <I> button, you can
select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the
number of copies to be printed for the
displayed image.
Quantity
Total images selected
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
Checkmark
Index icon
 Selecting Multiple Images
• Select Range
1
380
Select [Select range].
 Select [Select range] in [Multiple],
then press <0>.
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
the range of images.
2 Specify
 Select the first image, then press
<0>.
 Select the last image, then press
<0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the
selected images.
One copy of all the specified images
will be set for printing.
 To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
 To return to the previous screen,
press the <M> button.
• All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for
one copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you
select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for
all the images in the folder will be canceled.
• All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specified for printing. If you select [Clear all on card],
the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images or movies will not be specified for printing even if
you specify all images at once with [Multiple].
 When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than
400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images
may not all be printed.
381
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
3 Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image is displayed.
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
 Repeat this step to select another
image. The number of images that
have been specified will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
 To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
 To cancel the image specification,
press <0> again.
382
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
3 Specifying the Range
You can specify the range of images to select all the images in the
range at once.
1
Select [Select range].
 In [Multiple] under [x1: Photobook
Set-up], select [Select range], then
press <0>.
the range of images.
2 Specify
 Select the first image, then press
<0>.
 Select the last image, then press
<0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the
selected images.
 To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
 To return to the previous screen,
press the <M> button.
383
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
3 Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can also specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [Multiple] under [x1:
Photobook Set-up] is set to [All images
in folder] or [All images on card], all
the images in the folder or on the card
will be specified.
To clear your selections, select [Clear all
in folder] or [Clear all on card].
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. All the photobook
settings may be overwritten inadvertently.
384
B: Shooting Information Display
The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and
settings.
Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Bluetooth function
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi signal strength/
Eye-Fi transmission status
Battery level
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Rating
Protect images
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Folder number File numbering
Shutter speed
Image-recording
quality
Aperture
Exposure compensation
amount
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
 If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
 It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on
other cameras.
385
B: Shooting Information Display
 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Aperture
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Shooting date and time
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Shooting mode
Scroll bar
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Metering mode
File size
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Flash exposure compensation
amount / Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
White balance correction
Picture Style/Settings
Image-recording quality
* When you shoot in the 1+73 image-recording quality, the 1 file size will
be displayed.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* <u> will be displayed for images shot with the Creative filter function and for
images edited (resized or Creative filter applied) and then saved.
* For images cropped and then saved, <u> and <N> will be displayed.
386
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens / Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Focal length
Histogram display
(RGB)
• White balance information
• Picture Style information 1
• Picture Style information 2
• Color space / Noise
reduction information
• Lens aberration correction
information
If you used GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the image,
the “GPS information” screen will also appear.
387
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
Movie shooting mode/
Time-lapse movie
Creative filters/
Movie digital IS
Recording format
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Movie file size
Shooting time, Playback time
Compression method
* If manual exposure is used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when
set manually) will be displayed.
* The <t> icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
 AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed at the same
time.
388
B: Shooting Information Display
 Highlight Alert
When the shooting information is displayed, overexposed and
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain a better result for the blinking
areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set
the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [x3:
Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution
of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal
axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the
Dark image
left and brighter on the right), while the vertical
axis indicates how many pixels exist for each
brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker the image. The more
Normal brightness
pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the
image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost.
Bright image
The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram,
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how
many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The
more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the
color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color
information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,
the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the
image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and
gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
389
390
11
Post-Processing
Images
After taking a picture, you can apply a filter effect, resize
the JPEG image (reduce the pixel count), or crop the
JPEG image.
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing of images as described in this chapter cannot
be performed when the camera is connected to a computer
with an interface cable.
391
U Applying Creative Filter Effects
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1
Select [Creative filters].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to apply a
filter to.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
a filter effect.
3 Select
 When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed
(p.393).
 Select a filter, then press <0>.
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
the filter effect.
4 Adjust
 Adjust the filter effect, then press
<0>.
 For the Miniature effect, press the
<W> <X> keys to move the white
frame to where you want the image to
look sharp, then press <0>.
392
U Applying Creative Filter Effects
the image.
5 Save
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
 When shooting 1+73 or 1 image, the Creative filter will be applied
to the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.
 If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and the filter effect is applied
to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that is set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.341) will not be appended to images with Fish-eye
effect applied.
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
393
U Applying Creative Filter Effects
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant
noise.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that
makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the
color cast by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, if you press the <B> button (or tap on [T] on
the screen), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical and
horizontal orientations.
394
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4,
and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to resize.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
395
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Quality
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Quality
4
a
3
k
k
k
k
k
4
b
k
a
Image Sizes
The image sizes by aspect ratios are shown in the table below.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
16:9
1:1
4
3984x2656
3552x2664
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels)
4:3
3984x2240*
(8.9 megapixels)
2656x2656
(7.1 megapixels)
a
2976x1984
(5.9 megapixels)
2656x1992
(5.3 megapixels)
2976x1680*
(5.0 megapixels)
1984x1984
(3.9 megapixels)
b
2400x1600
(3.8 megapixels)
2112x1600*
(3.4 megapixels)
2400x1344*
(3.2 megapixels)
1600x1600
(2.6 megapixels)
 The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk
will differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
 The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
396
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped. JPEG images shot with
1+73 can be cropped.
1
Select [Cropping].
 Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to crop.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the cropping frame size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and tilt
correction.
 Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
 The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
 Press the <u> or <I> button.
 The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping
frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Changing the Cropping Frame Aspect Ratio
 Turn the <5> dial.
 Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or
[1:1].
 The aspect ratio will change as you turn the <5> dial. This also
enables you to crop the image shot in horizontal orientation to look
as if it was shot in vertical orientation.
397
N Cropping JPEG Images
Moving the Cropping Frame
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys.
 The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.
 You can also touch the cropping frame and drag it to the desired
position.
Correcting the Tilt
 Press the <B> button.
 Check the tilt with the displayed grid, then turn the <5> dial to
correct the tilt. You can correct the tilt up to ±10° in 0.1° increments.
 If you tap on [8] or [9] on the upper left of the screen, the tilt will be
corrected in 0.5° increments.
 Press <0>.
the cropped image in the
4 Display
full view.
 Press the <Q> button.
 You can see the cropped image.
 To return to the original display, press
the <Q> button again.
the cropped image.
5 Save
 Press <0>, then select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
 The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on
the angle set for tilt correction.
 Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again. In addition,
you cannot resize it or apply a Creative filter.
 AF point display information (p.388) and Dust Delete Data (p.341) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
398
12
Customizing the
Camera
You can make fine adjustments to various camera
functions to suit your picture-taking preferences with
Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and
work only in Creative Zone modes.
Cre
ati
v
e
ne
Zo
399
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
1
Custom Function number
Select [Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
Functions(C.Fn)], then press <0>.
the Custom Function
2 Select
number.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the Custom Function number, then
press <0>.
the setting as desired.
3 Change
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired setting (number), then
press <0>.
 Repeat steps 2 to 3 if you want to set
other Custom Functions.
 At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the <M> button.
 The screen in step 1 will reappear.
Clearing All Custom Functions
Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to
clear all the Custom Function settings (p.335).
Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the settings for [14:
Custom Controls] under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] will remain
unchanged.
400
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Custom Functions
C.Fn I: Exposure
1
Exposure level increments
2
ISO expansion
3
Exposure compensation auto cancel
p.402
A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
C.Fn II: Image
4
Highlight tone priority
p.403
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
5
AF-assist beam firing
6
AF area selection method
7
Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking
8
AF point display during focus
9
Viewfinder display illumination
10 Mirror lockup
p.404
k*
p.405
p.406
* When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is
used.
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
11 Warnings z in viewfinder
12 LCD display when power ON
13 Retract lens on power off
14 Custom Controls
p.407
p.408
k
k
Depends on setting
Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
401
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive,
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.
C.Fn-2
ISO expansion
0: Off
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you can set “H” (equivalent to ISO
51200) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) for
movies. Note that if [C.Fn-4: Highlight tone priority] is set to
[1:Enable], “H” cannot be selected.
C.Fn-3
Exposure compensation auto cancel
0: Enable
When you set the power switch to <2>, the exposure
compensation setting will be canceled.
1: Disable
The exposure compensation setting will remain in effect even if
you set the power switch to <2>.
402
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn II: Image
C.Fn-4
Highlight tone priority
0: Disable
1: Enable
Highlight details are improved. The dynamic range is expanded
from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation
between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.
 With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
 With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly
more noticeable than with setting 0.
With setting 1, the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 25600
(up to ISO 12800 for movies).
Also, the <A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel to indicate that highlight tone priority is enabled.
403
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
C.Fn-5
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOSdedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
0: Enable
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. This prevents the AFassist beam from disturbing others.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam
when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AFassist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. Set this when you do not want the camera to
fire the AF-assist beam as a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on as the AF-assist beam.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[1:Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam
will not be emitted.
C.Fn-6
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
0: S 9 AF area selection button
After you press the <S> or <B> button, each time you press the
<B> button, the AF area selection mode changes.
1: S 9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> or <B> button, turning the <6> dial
changes the AF area selection mode.
With setting 1, press the <Y> <Z> keys to move the AF point horizontally.
404
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn-7
Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking
Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin tones. This
function works when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF (manual selection
of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or Automatic selection AF.
0: Enable
The camera selects AF points automatically based on AF
information and information on colors equivalent to skin tones.
In One-Shot AF mode, focusing on a still human subject in the AF
area is made easier.
In AI Servo AF mode, focusing on a human subject in the AF area is made
easier. If no skin tones can be detected, the nearest subject will be focused
on. Once focus is achieved, AF points are automatically selected so that
the camera continues to focus on the color of the area it focused on first.
1: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
 With setting [0:Enable], focusing will take slightly longer than with setting
[1:Disable].
 Even with setting [0:Enable], the expected result may not be obtained
depending on the shooting conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,
AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information. (The
AF will not use information on colors equivalent to skin tones.)
C.Fn-8
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following cases: 1.
when selecting the AF point(s), 2. when the camera is ready to shoot (before
AF operation), 3. during AF operation, and 4. when focus is achieved.
0: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.
1: All (constant)
All the AF points are always displayed.
2: Selected (pre-AF,focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
3: Selected AF pt (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.
4: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
With setting 2 or 3, the AF point will not be displayed even when focus is
achieved with AI Servo AF.
405
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn-9
Viewfinder display illumination
You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder will light up in red
when focus is achieved.
0: Auto
The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.
1: Enable
The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.
2: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
When AI Servo AF is set, the AF points will not light up in red even when
focus is achieved.
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the AF points will be
illuminated in red regardless of this setting.
 The aspect ratio lines (p.156), and the electronic level, grid, and flicker
detection set with [52: Viewfinder display] will also light up in red.
C.Fn-10
Mirror lockup
0: Disable
1: Enable
You can prevent the camera vibration blur due to the mechanical
vibrations (mirror shock) inside the camera during shooting with
super telephoto lenses or shooting close-ups (macro
photography). See page 209 for the mirror lockup procedure.
406
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
C.Fn-11
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <i> icon can be
displayed on the viewfinder’s bottom left (p.34). The <i> icon will also
appear on the Quick Control screen (p.58).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear,
press <0> to add a checkmark [X], then select [OK].
When monochrome V is set:
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.162), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected:
If white balance correction is set (p.173), the warning icon will
appear.
When M is set:
If [z4: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] (p.176), the warning icon will appear.
When [s: Shooting screen] is set to [Guided], this Custom Function
does not function. (Settings are disabled.)
C.Fn-12
LCD display when power ON
0: Display on
When you turn on the power, the Quick Control screen will appear
(p.58).
1: Previous display status
When you turn on the power, the camera will start with the LCD
monitor display in the state it was in when the power was last
turned off. Therefore, if you turn off the camera when the LCD
monitor is off, nothing will be displayed when you turn on the
camera again. This helps to save battery power. The menu
operations and image playback will be available as usual.
407
3 Custom Function Setting ItemsN
C.Fn-13
Retract lens on power off
This is the setting for the lens retraction mechanism when a geardriven STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the
camera. You can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when
the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
0: Enable
1: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
With setting 0, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s focus mode
switch setting (AF or MF).
C.Fn-14
Custom Controls
You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 409.
408
Custom ControlsN
You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences for easy operations.
1
Select [Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
Functions(C.Fn)], then press <0>.
[14: Custom Controls].
2 Select
 The Custom Controls setting screen
will appear.
a camera button or dial.
3 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
 The diagram on the left will show the
location of the selected button or dial.
a function.
4 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 3 will
reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [14: Custom
Controls] settings will remain unchanged even if you select [Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)] under [54: Clear settings].
409
Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
AF
Exposure
Flash
Images
Operation
a
Metering and AF start
b AF stop
q
Metering start
t
AE lock/FE lock
A
AE lock
A
AE lock (while button pressed)
d
FE lock
f
Exposure compensation (hold button,
turnS)
y
Flash exposure compensation
0/3 Flash function settings
g
Image quality
M Menu display
j
No function (disabled)
Page
410
410
V
r
k
k
k
k
k
k
411
k
k
412
412
412
k
a: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are performed.
b: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
q: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed. (AF is not performed.)
410
Custom ControlsN
t
s
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
A: AE lock
k
When you press the button assigned to this function,
you can lock the exposure (AE lock) while the
metering timer is active. Useful when you want to
set the focus and exposure separately.
k
k
k
t: AE lock/FE lock
Normal shooting (No flash)
When you press the button assigned to this function,
you can lock the exposure (AE lock) while the
metering timer is active. Useful when you want to
set the focus and exposure separately or take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
With flash
For flash photography, pressing the button assigned
to this function will fire a preflash and record the
required flash output (FE lock).
k
A: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you hold down the shutter
button.
d: FE lock
For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will
fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
f: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn S)
You can set the exposure compensation by turning the <6> dial while
holding down <0>. Useful when you want to set exposure
compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO Auto set.
411
Custom ControlsN
y: Flash exposure compensation
Press <0> to display the exposure compensation setting screen
(p.218) for the attached (built-in or external) flash unit on the LCD
monitor.
0/3: Flash function settings
Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.225) on the
LCD monitor.
g: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.152) on the LCD monitor.
M: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
j: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
412
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs, and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
 Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
 You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
When [s: Menu display] is set to [Guided], the [9] tab will not be
displayed. Change the [Menu display] to [Standard] (p.61).
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
413
3 Registering My MenuN
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
 Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W> <X>
keys to change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
the registered items under the tab.
414
3 Registering My MenuN
 Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
 Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to move the n and select the
desired character. Then press <0>
to enter it.
 By selecting [E], you can
change the input mode.
 You can enter up to 16 characters.
 To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
3 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The set name is saved.
If you cannot enter text in step 2, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
415
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting All My Menu Tabs / Deleting All Items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered under
them.
 Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select
[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY
MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
 Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items] is
selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be
deleted.
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names
renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
416
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
 Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
 Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
 Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 3, 5, and s tabs will not
be displayed.)
417
418
13
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [55: Certification Logo Display]* and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
* Displayed under the [54] tab during movie shooting.
419
B Button Functions
When you press the <B> button with
the camera being ready to shoot, you
can toggle the display between the
electronic level and Quick Control
screen.
[z button display options] under
the [53] tab enables you to select the
options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option,
then press <0> to add a checkmark
<X>.
 After completing the selection, select
[OK], then press <0>.
Electronic level
Quick Control screen
 You cannot remove the checkmarks from both items.
 Even if you set the [Electronic level] not to be displayed, it will still be
displayed during Live View shooting and movie shooting by pressing the
<B> button.
420
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using on the LCD
monitor.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery information screen will
appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level (p.46) is displayed.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in three levels.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is slightly
degraded.
(Red) : Purchasing a new
battery is recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you use
batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
instructions in the message.
421
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E18 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately).
1
Connect the DC coupler’s plug.
 Connect the DC coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
the power cord.
2 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the DC coupler.
3 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
and insert the DC coupler securely
until it locks.
in the DC cord.
4 Push
 Open the DC cord hole cover and
install the cord as shown in the
illustration.
 Close the battery compartment cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord when the camera’s power
switch is set to <1>.
422
Remote Control Shooting
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (Sold Separately)
You can use a Bluetooth connection with Bluetooth low energy
technology-compatible Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 for remote
control operations. In order to use the BR-E1, you first need to pair the
camera and remote controller (registering the device to the
camera).
Pairing
1
Select [Wireless communication
settings].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Wireless
communication settings], then
press <0>.
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
3 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Remote].
4 Select
 If a message “Register a nickname to
identify the camera.” appears, press
<0> and register a nickname. For
the procedure to register a nickname,
refer to page 13 of the Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) Function
Instruction Manual.
423
Remote Control Shooting
[Pairing].
5 Select
 Select [Pairing], then press <0>.
 Press and hold the <W> button and
<T> button simultaneously for 3 sec.
or more.
 Pairing starts. After the pairing is
complete, the remote controller is
registered to the camera.
 For operations after the pairing is
complete, refer to Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1’s Instruction Manual.
After pairing is complete, the battery will be consumed even during auto
power off, so the remaining battery level may be low when using the
camera.
 When you are not using BR-E1, set [Bluetooth function] to [Disable] in
step 4. When you want to use the remote controller again, simply select
[Remote] to connect to the remote controller.
 When the shooting ends, the camera’s self-timer lamp will light up briefly.
Clear Remote Controller Connection Information
To pair with another BR-E1, clear the connection information of the
remote controller currently connected.
You can check the connection status of the camera and remote
controller from the [Check/clear connection info] screen in step 4.
1
Select [Wireless communication
settings].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Wireless
communication settings], then
press <0>.
424
Remote Control Shooting
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Check/clear connection
3 Select
info].
4 Press the <B> button.
Bluetooth address of the remote controller
[Connecting...] is displayed when the remote
controller is not being operated.
the connection information.
5 Clear
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The remote controller’s connection
information will be cleared.
425
Remote Control Shooting
Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)
This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to
approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or with a 2-sec. delay.
Remote control sensor
 Set the drive mode to <Q> (p.149).
 Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control
sensor, then press the transmit button.
 The camera will autofocus.
 When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the
picture will be taken.
Cautions for Remote Control Shooting
 The BR-E1 and RC-6 cannot be used simultaneously. Set the
[Bluetooth function] to [Disable] when using the RC-6.
 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
 If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this
camera, it may cause camera malfunction by triggering the shutter
inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from
a flash on another camera.
Notes for Remote Control Shooting
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 or RC-5 (each sold separately).
 Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite
equipped with a remote-release function.
 Remote control shooting is also possible during movie shooting (p.275).
 In remote control shooting, even if [52: Auto power off] is set to
[1 min.] or less, the auto power off time will be approx. 2 min.
426
Remote Control Shooting
F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)
Remote Switch RS-60E3 comes with an approx. 60 cm/2.0 ft cord.
When connected to the camera’s remote control terminal, it can be
pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter button.
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as
when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray
light entering the viewfinder may cause the picture to look dark. To
prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.37) attached to the camera strap.
Note that attaching the eyepiece cover is not necessary in Live
View shooting or movie shooting.
1
Detach the eyecup.
 Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach it.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down into the
eyepiece groove.
427
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions
(including wireless transfer). In case of a problem with an EyeFi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note
that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries
or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted.
If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in
your area, please check with the card manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.41).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
the connection information.
4 Display
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
428
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons in the
sequence below.
 For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
Transmission status icon
(p.385).
H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H (Blinking) Connecting...: Connecting to access point.
H (Illuminated) Connected: Connection to access point established.
H () Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 Under [Wi-Fi settings] of [51: Wireless communication settings], if
[Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card will not be
possible.
 If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card information.
Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, on airplanes, and in other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera beforehand.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and computer
settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image transfer
may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 Because of the communication function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
 The camera’s battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi settings]
will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not appear.
429
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes:
A7C2345
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
A
7
C
2
3
4
5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
D D D D D D D
Manual selection
k
k
Ambience-based shots
Background blur
Brightness
k
k
k
k
Color tone
Auto
White balance
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Lens
aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Diffraction correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Anti-flicker shooting*1
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering
Center-weighted average metering
Metering mode selection
*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
430
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
AF operation
(Viewfinder
shooting)
7
C
2
3
4
o*2
o
o
5
o*2
AI Servo AF
o*2
o
o*2
o
o*2
o
o
o
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting k
Low-speed continuous shooting k
Self-timer
k
Automatic firing
k
Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
Flash off
k
Red-eye reduction
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
AF area selection mode
AF
A
One-Shot AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
o
k
k
Program shift
Exposure compensation
Exposure
AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Interval timer*1
Single shooting
Drive
Built-in flash
o
o
o
FE lock*1
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
External flash
o
o
Flash off
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
*2: AF will be performed using color tracking.
431
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes: 8
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
8
q
C
P
x
6
F
G
k
k
k
k
k
k*1
k*1
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
D D D D D D D
Manual selection
Ambience-based shots
Background blur
k
Brightness
Color tone
Auto
White balance
Q
k
k
k
k
k
Q Qw Q
k
k
Q
Q
Q
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Lens
aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Diffraction correction
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Anti-flicker shooting*2
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering
Center-weighted average metering
Metering mode selection
*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
432
o
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
AF operation
(Viewfinder
shooting)
One-Shot AF
C
P
o
8
x
6
o
o
F
o
G
o*3
o
o
o
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
o*3
AI Servo AF
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
AF area selection mode
AF
q
o*3
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
o
k
k
o
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
Program shift
Exposure compensation
Exposure
AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting k
Low-speed continuous shooting k
Self-timer
k
Automatic firing
k
Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
Flash off
k
Red-eye reduction
k
Interval timer*2
Single shooting
Drive
Built-in flash
FE lock*2
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
External flash
o
o
Flash off
o
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.
433
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes: v
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable*1
: Not selectable/Disabled
v
G
W
X
Z
H
c
A B C D
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
PPDPPPDPPP
Manual selection
Ambience-based shots
Background blur
Brightness
Color tone
Auto
White
balance
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction o
Lens
aberration
correction
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Chromatic aberration correction o
Distortion correction
Diffraction correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Anti-flicker shooting*2
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering
Center-weighted average metering
Metering mode selection
*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
434
o
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
AF operation One-Shot AF
(Viewfinder AI Servo AF
shooting)
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
v
G
W
X
Z
H
c
o*3 o*3 o o*3 o*3 o
o o o o o o
AF area selection mode k
k
o
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Flash on (Fires at all times) k
Flash off
k
Built-in flash Red-eye reduction
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
A B C D
o*3 o*3 o*3 o*3
o
o
o
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Program shift
Exposure compensation
Exposure
AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Interval timer*2
Single shooting
Drive
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Self-timer
Automatic firing
FE lock*2
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times) o
External
flash
Flash off
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.
435
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
Manual selection
Creative filters*1*2
Auto
White balance
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Diffraction correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Anti-flicker shooting*3
Color space
Metering
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering mode selection
*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.
436
: Not selectable/Disabled
d
s
f
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
AF operation
(Viewfinder
shooting)
Function
d
s
f
a
One-Shot AF
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AI Servo AF
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
AF area selection mode*3
AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
Program shift
Exposure compensation
Exposure
AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Interval timer*3
Single shooting
Drive
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Self-timer
*4
k
*5
k
k
k
k
k
k
Automatic firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
Built-in flash
Red-eye reduction
FE lock*3
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
External flash
Flash off
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*4: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*5: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
437
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
A 7 C
2
3
4
y
d
u
Select movie recording
k
size
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Digital zoom
: Not selectable/Disabled
5 8 v
s f a
k
o k
*1
M
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
HDR movie shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
k
Picture Automatically set DDDDDDDDP k
Style Manual selection
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
QQQQQQQQQ k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Creative filters
Video snapshot
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Time-lapse movie
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Automatically set/
o
Auto
o
o
o
o
o
o
ISO
speed
o
o
k
Manually set
Auto
Preset
White
balance Custom
Correction
Auto Lighting Optimizer o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Peripheral illumination
o
correction
Lens
aberration
correction Chromatic aberration o
correction
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
High ISO speed
noise reduction
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Highlight tone priority
Movie digital IS
k
k
k
*1: w and x cannot be selected.
438
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
2
3
4
5 8 v
y
d
u
s f a
k
M
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Face+Tracking
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Smooth zone
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Live 1-point AF
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manual
focusing (MF)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Movie Servo AF k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Exposure
compensation
k
k
k
*2
AE lock
k
k
k
*3
Metering
AF
A 7 C
Program shift
Exposure
Depth-of-field
preview
Aspect ratio
Sound recording
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*2: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*3: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
439
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15II
270EX II
430EX III-RT/
430EX III
600EX II-RT
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Magnifier
MG-Ef
Eyecup Ef
Rubber Frame Ef
Strap
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Angle Finder C
Semi Hard Case
EH26-L/EH27-L
Battery Pack
LP-E17
Battery Charger
LC-E17E
AC Adapter
AC-E6N*1
Protecting Cloth
PC-E1
Hand Strap E2
440
DC Coupler
DR-E18*1
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2*2
Wireless
Remote
Control
BR-E1
Remote
Controller
RC-6
Remote Timer Remote
Switch
Controller
RS-60E3 TC-80N3
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Directional Stereo Microphone
DM-E1
Interface Cable
IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Connect Station
CS100
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card reader
Computer
Card slot
*1: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 can also be used.
*2: The digital compass cannot be used with this camera. (Shooting direction
will not be recorded.)
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
441
3 Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting (Basic Zone Modes)
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Image quality
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/
1+73*/1*
152
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
325
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
324
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
217
Interval timer
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
Enable / Disable
Live View shooting
* Not selectable in the <8: FG> and <v> modes.
211
243
Live View Shooting (Basic Zone Modes)
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Image quality
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/
1+73*/1*
152
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
325
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
324
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
* Not selectable in the <8: FG> and <v> modes.
217
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
AF method
u+Tracking / Smooth zone /
Live 1-point AF
259
Touch shutter
Disable / Enable
269
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
255

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
 The menu tabs and options displayed under [x (Playback)],
[5 (Set-up)], and [9 (My Menu)] are basically the same for viewfinder
shooting, Live View shooting, and movie shooting, although there may
be slight differences.
442
3 Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
(Creative Zone Modes)
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Image quality
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/1+73/1
152
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
325
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
324
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
179
Distortion correction: Disable / Enable
Diffraction correction: Enable / Disable
Lens electronic MF
Disable after One-Shot AF /
Enable after One-Shot AF
128
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops*
(AEB ±2 stops)
206
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash
synchronization speed in Av mode / Built-in flash
settings / External flash function settings /
External flash C.Fn setting / Clear settings
223
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
217
zISO speed
ISO speed setting
158
zISO Auto
Max.:400 / Max.:800 / Max.:1600 / Max.:3200 /
Max.:6400 / Max.:12800 / Max.:25600
160
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
175
Disable during manual exposure
* During Live View shooting or when [s: Shooting screen] is set to [Guided],
exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.
443
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Metering mode
q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /
r Spot metering / e Center-weighted
average metering
203
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
187
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail /
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /
WUser Defined 1-3
161
White balance
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O
169
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
171
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias,
9 levels each
173
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
174
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
177
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
176
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used with Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to delete dust
spots
341
White balance shift/
bracketing
z: Shooting 4 (Red)
z: Shooting 5 (Red)
Interval timer*
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
211
Bulb timer
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
201
Anti-flicker shooting*
Disable / Enable
185
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
156
Live View shooting*
Enable / Disable
* Not displayed for Live View shooting.
444
243
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 6* (Red)
Page
AF method
u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF
259
Touch shutter
Disable / Enable
269
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
255
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
* The [z6] tab appears in Live View shooting.
255
x: Playback 1 (Blue)
Protect images
Protect images
372
Rotate image
Rotate images
352
Erase images
Erase images
375
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
378
Photobook Set-up
Specify images for a photobook
382
Creative filters
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
392
x: Playback 2 (Blue)
Cropping
Crop part of the image
397
Resize
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
395
Rating
Rate images
353
Slide show
Display time / Repeat / Transition effect /
Background music
366
Set image search
conditions
Rating / Date / Folder / Protect / Type of file
356
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / Jump images by the
specified number / Date / Folder / Movies /
Stills / Protect / Rating
347
445
3 Menu Settings
x: Playback 3 (Blue)
Page
AF point display
Disable / Enable
388
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
389
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
370
Create and select a folder
327
Numbering: Continuous / Auto reset
329
Manual reset
331
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
334
Format card
Erase data on the card by formatting
74
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available
Eye-Fi card is inserted
428
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Select folder
File numbering
Wi-Fi settings:
Wi-Fi/NFC connection / Password / Connection
history / MAC address
Wireless
communication
settings
Wi-Fi function:
Transfer images between cameras / Connect to
smartphone / Remote control (EOS Utility) /
Print from Wi-Fi printer / Upload to Web service
Bluetooth function:
Bluetooth function / Pairing / Check/clear
connection info / Bluetooth address
-*
Send images to smartphone
Nickname
Clear settings
* For details, refer to the Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction
Manual.
446
3 Menu Settings
 When using a wireless communication function, be sure to check the
countries and areas of use, and observe the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
 [51: Wireless communication settings] cannot be selected if the
camera is connected to a computer, GPS receiver, or another device with
an interface cable.
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Page
Auto power off
10 sec/30 sec / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. /
4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / Disable
325
LCD brightness
Adjust the brightness (seven levels)
326
LCD auto off*
Enable / Disable
338
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
47
Language K
Select the interface language
50
Electronic level: Hide / Show
78
Grid display: Hide / Show
80
Viewfinder display*
Flicker detection: Show / Hide
* Not displayed for Live View shooting or movie shooting.
81
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
GPS device settings
Settings available when the GPS Receiver
GP-E2 (sold separately) is attached
Video system
For NTSC / For PAL
Touch control
Standard / Sensitive / Disable
73
Beep
Enable / Touch n / Disable
324
Battery information
Remaining capacity / Recharge performance
421
z button display
Electronic level / Quick Control screen
options*
* Not displayed for Live View shooting or movie shooting.
369
420
447
3 Menu Settings
Cautions for Using GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately)
 Check if your country or area allows the use of GPS and follow any legal
regulations.
 Update the GP-E2’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or later. (Using the cable
for connection is not possible with firmware versions earlier than Version
2.0.0.) When updating the firmware, an interface cable (sold separately,
p.441) must be used. For how to update the GP-E2’s firmware, refer to
the Canon website.
 Note that the digital compass cannot be used with this camera. (Shooting
direction will not be recorded.)
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Page
Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning*
Clean nowf
Clean manually
339
343
Main Dial
Multi function lock
Quick Control Dial
57
Touch control
Custom Functions
(C.Fn)
Customize camera functions as desired
402
Clear settings
Clear all camera settings / Clear all Custom
Functions (C.Fn)
335
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
Manual/software URL QR code for the download site
* Displayed under the [53] tab during movie shooting.
448
332
5
3 Menu Settings
5: Set-up 5*1 (Yellow)
Certification Logo
Display*2
Page
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
419
z firmware ver.*3
For updating the firmware
*1: Not displayed for movie shooting.
*2: Displayed under the [54] tab during movie shooting.
*3: Not displayed for Live View shooting.
-
To prevent an inadvertent update of the firmware, selecting [z firmware
ver.] will disable touch control.
s: Display level settings (Blue green)
Shooting screen*
Standard / Guided
59
Menu display
Standard / Guided
61
Mode guide*
Enable / Disable
62
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
* Cannot be set during Live View shooting or movie shooting.
63
9: My Menu* (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
413
Delete all My Menu
tabs
Delete all My Menu tabs
416
Delete all items
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
416
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Menu display
Display only My Menu tab
* Not displayed when [s: Menu display] is set to [Guided].
417
449
3 Menu Settings
k Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Movie recording size
• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• Standard / Light
287
Digital zoom
Disable / Approx. 3-10x zoom
313
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Recording level
Sound recording*
Wind filter: Auto / Disable
313
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
179
Disable after One-Shot AF /
128
Enable after One-Shot AF
* In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will be
[On/Off].
Lens electronic MF
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±3 stops
206
kISO speed*
ISO speed setting
158
320
kISO Auto
Max.:6400 / Max.:12800
320
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disable during manual exposure
* Settable only for manual exposures.
450
175
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail / SNeutral /
UFaithful / VMonochrome /
WUser Defined 1-3
161
White balance
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O
169
Custom White
Balance
Manual setting of white balance
171
B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
173
White balance shift
z: Shooting
4*
(Red)
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
315
AF method
u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF
316
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
316
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
317
V button function
a/-/q/-/a/k/q/k
317
* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
Video snapshot
Album settings: Create a new album /
Add to existing album
303
Show confirm message: Enable / Disable
Time-lapse movie
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots /
Auto exposure / LCD auto off / Beep as image
taken)
296
Remote control
shooting
Disable / Enable
318
Movie digital IS
Disable / Enable / Enhanced
319
* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.
451
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
 Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack),
the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink
in orange. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait two
or three minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If
the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service
Center.
The camera is not activated even when
the power switch is set to <1>.





Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.40).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.40).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.41).
Recharge the battery (p.38).
Press the <B> button (p.76).
The access lamp still blinks even when
the power switch is <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is complete, the power will turn off
automatically.
452
Troubleshooting Guide
[Battery communication error. Does this battery/do these
batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed.
 Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.40).
 If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery (p.38).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.421). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• Using the Wi-Fi function.
• The Eye-Fi card’s transmission is enabled.
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.325).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min.
(The camera’s power does not turn off.) Press the <B> button to
turn on the LCD monitor.
453
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.51).
The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.38).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.41).
 Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (p.41).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.41, 375).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.54, 146).
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 41 or 467.
An error message is displayed when
the card is inserted in another camera.
 SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT. This means that if you format a
card with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error
may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.
454
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.




Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.51).
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.53-54).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.192), set a higher ISO speed (p.158), use flash (p.216), or
use a tripod.
There are fewer AF points.
 Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns varies. The lenses are categorized into eight groups from A to
H. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups E
to H will have fewer usable AF points (p.139-140).
The AF point is blinking.
 Regarding the AF points lighting up or blinking when you press the
<S> or <B> button, see page 132.
The AF points do not light up in red.
 The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low light or
with a dark subject.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have the AF points
light in red for when focus is achieved (p.406).
455
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF mode or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode
(p.124).
Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone
look strange.
 Horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular exposures can be caused by
fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone may
not come out right. A slow shutter speed may reduce the problem.
The standard exposure cannot be
obtained or the exposure is irregular.
 During viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting, if you use a TS-E
lens (except the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II) and shift or tilt
the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure may not be
obtained or the exposure may be irregular.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 The maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, battery type, remaining
battery level, shooting function settings, etc. For details, see page 148.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number listed on page 153.
456
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set.
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1:Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0:Disable] is set, ISO
100 can be set (p.403). This also applies to movie shooting (p.320).
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected.
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1:Enable], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 ISO 25600 (up to ISO 12800 for movies) even when [2: ISO
expansion] is set to [1:On]. If [0:Disable] is set for [4: Highlight tone
priority], [H] can be set (p.403). This also applies to movie shooting
(p.320).
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [4: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1:Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If
[0:Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.403).
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Standard]
[Low] [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.175).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.224).
457
Troubleshooting Guide
The built-in flash rises by itself.
 In shooting modes (<A> <C> <2> <4> <8: qC6>
<v: GWXZH>) whose default setting is <a> (Built-in autoflash),
the built-in flash will be raised automatically when necessary.
 In the <8: xG> and <v: ABCD> modes, when you
press the shutter button halfway under low-light conditions, the built-in
flash may be raised automatically and emit the AF-assist beam.
The built-in flash does not fire.
 If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the
flash may stop firing for a while to protect the light-emitting unit.
The external flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.222).
 Under [z2: Flash control], if [Flash metering mode] in [External
flash C.Fn setting] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the
flash will always be fired at full output (p.228).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be
set for the external Speedlite.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite,
compensation amount cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to
0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.224).
458
Troubleshooting Guide
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
 A small noise may be heard when the camera’s internal mechanism
moves slightly.
The shutter makes two release sounds during
Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two release sounds each time
you shoot (p.244).
During Live View shooting, a white s or
red E icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View
shooting will soon stop automatically (p.273).
During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red
<E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will soon
stop automatically (p.321).
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 8. To find
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.
 If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting will stop
automatically.
459
Troubleshooting Guide
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically.
In the <a> mode, you can manually set the ISO speed (p.281).
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting may cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right or shoot a moving subject,
the image may look distorted.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during
movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed
may reduce the problem.
460
Troubleshooting Guide
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi cannot be set.
 If the camera is connected to a computer, GPS receiver, or other
device with an interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. ([51:
Wireless communication settings] will be grayed out.) Disconnect
the interface cable before setting any functions.
 Refer to the Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction
Manual.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>,
<5>, or touch screen.
 Set the <R> switch downward (lock release, p.57).
 Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.57).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
 Under [54: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], check the [14: Custom
Controls] setting (p.409).
 During movie shooting, check the [V btn function] setting (p.317).
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
 Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.28).
Touch operation is not possible.
 Check if [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.73).
461
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The LCD monitor does not turn on or suddenly turns off.
 If there is dust on top of the eyepiece cover (p.427), the LCD monitor
may not turn on or may suddenly turn off, due to incorrect operation of
the display-off sensor. If this occurs, remove the dust.
 If the LCD monitor does not turn on with Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15ll
(sold separately) or Magnifier MG-Ef (sold separately) attached to the
viewfinder, set [52: LCD auto off] to [Disable] (p.338).
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In Basic Zone modes, certain tabs and menu options are not
displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.67).
 Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu
tab] (p.417).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.187).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
 It is a movie file (p.331).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image file number
may not start from 0001 (p.331).
462
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
 Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.47).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.47).
The date and time are not in the image.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the
date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.378).
[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.355).
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
 In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become
slower due to the AF point display device’s characteristics. The display
speed will return to normal at room temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.428).
 If [Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable] for [Wi-Fi settings] under [51: Wireless
communication settings], [Eye-Fi settings] cannot be selected even
when an Eye-Fi card is installed.
463
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 It is the highlight alert (p.389). Overexposed areas with clipped
highlight will blink.
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.372).
The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the
camera.
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be
heard during movie playback.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.313).
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
 If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily until the
brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in the <a> mode (p.280).
No picture on the TV set.
 Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or
[For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
 Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.369).
464
Troubleshooting Guide
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.289). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted
with the camera, you can record a movie in a single file even if it
exceeds 4 GB.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating
system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a case,
connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable, then
transfer the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software,
p.488).
The image cannot be resized.
 With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b or RAW images (p.395).
The image cannot be cropped.
 With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (p.397).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.388).
A red box is not displayed on the image.
 Even if [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.388), the red box is
not displayed for the following images:
• Images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.176)
• Images recorded with distortion correction enabled (p.181)
• Images shot in the <8: qFG> or <v: ABCD>
modes
• Cropped images (p.397)
• Images with Fish-eye effect applied after shooting (p.392)
465
Troubleshooting Guide
Dots of light appear on the image.
 White, red, blue, or other colored dots of light may appear on images if
the sensor is affected by cosmic rays, etc. Their appearance may be
suppressed if you perform [Clean nowf] under [54: Sensor
cleaning] (p.339).
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
 When you select [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a mechanical
sound, but no picture is taken (p.339).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within a
short time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.45).
Computer Connection Problems
Communication between the connected camera and
computer does not work.
 When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie]
to [Disable] (p.296).
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
 Install EOS software on the computer (p.488).
 While a Wi-Fi connection is established, the camera cannot be
connected to a computer with an interface cable.
466
Error Codes
Error number
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.27, 28, 40).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with the camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.41, 74).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
05
 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.41, 375, 74).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
 Operate the power switch (p.45).
06
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.45).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
use a Canon lens (p.45, 40, 51).
* If the error message still appears after following the above instructions,
write down the error code number and contact your nearest Canon Service
Center.
467
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in
flash
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported
Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent angle of view is that of a lens with
approx. 1.6x the focal length indicated.)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 24.2 megapixels
* Rounded to the nearest 100,000.
3:2
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Pixels recorded:
Aspect ratio:
Create/select a folder:
File numbering:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
M (Medium) : Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 x 2656)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 x 1984)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 3.8 megapixels (2400 x 1600)
RAW
: 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Possible
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
White balance:
468
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom
White balance correction, and White balance bracketing
provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
Specifications
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction, Distortion correction, Diffraction correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Eye-level pentamirror
Field of view coverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx.
19 mm and aspect ratio set to 3:2)
Magnification:
Approx. 0.82x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Eyepoint:
Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Dioptric adjustment
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
range:
Focusing screen:
Fixed, Precision Matte
Grid display:
Provided
Electronic level display: Provided
Mirror:
Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
• Autofocus (for viewfinder shooting)
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
Max. 45 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points)
* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF
points, and cross-type AF points vary depending on the
lens used and aspect ratio settings.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.
(AF group: When Group A lenses are used)
Focusing brightness
EV -3 - 18 (with the center AF point supporting f/2.8,
range:
One-Shot AF, at room temperature, ISO 100)
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF,
Manual focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of
zone), Automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
Automatic AF point selection possible based on color
selection conditions:
information equivalent to skin tones.
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
469
Specifications
• Exposure Control
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
Shooting mode:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
AE lock:
Flicker reduction:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
470
63-zone TTL open-aperture metering using 7560-pixel
RGB plus IR metering sensor
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.0% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.5% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Basic Zone modes:
Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative Auto, Portrait,
Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special scene modes
(Group Photo, Kids, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait,
Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control), Creative
filters (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Water
painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect, HDR
art standard, HDR art vivid, HDR art bold, HDR art
embossed)
Creative Zone modes:
Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,
Manual exposure
Basic Zone modes: ISO speed set automatically
Creative Zone modes: ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 25600
set manually (whole-stop increments), and ISO
expansion to H (equivalent to ISO 51200) provided
Maximum limit for ISO Auto settable
Manual: ±5* stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
* With [s: Shooting screen: Guided] set, ±3 stops
AEB:
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: With AE lock button
Provided
Shooting interval and number of shots settable
Bulb exposure time settable
Specifications
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speed:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;
available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/200 sec.
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst:
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting,
Low-speed continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/
remote control, 2-sec. delay, 10-sec. delay with
continuous shooting
High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 6.0 shots/
sec.*
* Max. approx. 4.5 shots/sec. during Live View shooting
or when [Servo AF] is set.
Low-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/
sec.*
* Max. approx. 3.5 shots/sec. during Live View shooting
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 190 shots (Card Full)
RAW: Approx. 21 shots (approx. 27 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 19 shots (approx. 23
shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2
aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style) using
an 8 GB card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
16 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
* “Card Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the
card becomes full.
471
Specifications
• Flash
Built-in flash:
External Speedlite:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 12/39.4 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recharge time: Approx. 3 sec.
Compatible with EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite function
settings, external Speedlite Custom Function settings
Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible
• Live View Shooting
Focus method:
AF method:
AF operation:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
Exposure
compensation:
Creative filters:
Touch shutter:
Grid display:
472
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system
Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
One-Shot AF, Servo AF
EV -2 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot AF)
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 6.0% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.6% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
Provided
Three types
Specifications
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
Compression method:
Bit rate:
Focus system:
AF method:
Movie Servo AF:
Movie digital IS:
Digital zoom:
Focusing brightness
range:
MP4
* Time-lapse movie shooting: MOV
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
AAC
Full HD (1920x1080): 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/
23.98p
HD (1280x720)
: 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p
VGA (640x480)
: 29.97p/25.00p
IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)
* Time-lapse movie shooting: ALL-I
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 30 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 12 Mbps
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 26 Mbps
HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: Approx. 4 Mbps
VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Standard)
: Approx. 9 Mbps
VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Light)
: Approx. 3 Mbps
HDR Movie
: Approx. 30 Mbps
Time-lapse movie
: Approx. 90 Mbps
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system
Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification available
for focus check)
Provided
Provided (Enable/Enhanced)
Approx. 3x - 10x
EV -2 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot AF)
473
Specifications
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
Exposure control:
Exposure
compensation:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO speed settings:
HDR Movie Shooting:
Creative filters for
movies:
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:
Grid display:
Time-lapse movie:
Still photo shooting:
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the AF method
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100, with centerweighted average metering)
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting)
and manual exposure
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
For autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
automatically. In Creative Zone modes, the upper limit is
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
For manual exposure shooting: ISO Auto (ISO 100 - ISO
12800 set automatically), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
manually (whole-stop increments), expandable to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600)
Maximum limit for ISO Auto settable
Possible
Dream, Old Movies, Memory, Dramatic B&W, Miniature
effect movie
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone
terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Three types
Shooting interval (hours:minutes:seconds), Number of
shots, Auto exposure (Fixed 1st frame, Each frame),
LCD auto off, Beep as image shot settable
Not possible during movie shooting
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Touch screen
technology:
474
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 7.7 cm (3.0 in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Capacitive sensing
Specifications
• Playback
Image display format:
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Zoom magnification
ratio:
Image search:
Image browsing
methods:
Image rotation:
Image protection:
Rating:
Movie playback:
Slide show:
Background music:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with basic information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,
Lens aberration correction), Index display (4/9/36/100
images)
Overexposed highlights blink
Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting
conditions)
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Search conditions settable (Rating, Date, Folder, Protect,
File type)
Single image, 10 images, specified number, date, folder,
movies, stills, protect, rating
Possible
Possible
Provided
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI), built-in speaker
Automatically play back all images or the images that
match search conditions
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
• Post-Processing of Images
Creative filters:
Resize:
Cropping:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Provided
Provided
• Print Ordering
DPOF:
Version 1.1 compliant
• Customization Features
Custom Functions:
My Menu:
Copyright information:
Display level settings:
14
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Text entry and appending possible
Shooting screen, Menu display, Mode guide,
Feature guide
475
Specifications
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
Computer communication (Hi-Speed USB equivalent),
GPS Receiver GP-E2, Connect Station CS100
connection
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
HDMI mini OUT
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 connection
Remote control terminal:For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(Bluetooth connection) and Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Supported
• Power
Battery:
Number of possible
shots:
Movie shooting time:
Battery Pack LP-E17 (Quantity 1)
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
With viewfinder shooting: Approx. 600 shots at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 550 shots at low
temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting: Approx. 270 shots at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 230 shots at low
temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17.
Approx. 1 hr. 55 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F)
Approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 131.0 x 99.9 x 76.2 mm / 5.16 x 3.93 x 3.00 in.
Weight:
Approx. 540 g / 19.05 oz. (Including battery and card)
Approx. 493 g / 17.39 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
476
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
Specifications
• Battery Pack LP-E17
Type:
Rated voltage:
Battery capacity:
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Weight:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.2 V DC
1040 mAh
For charging: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
For shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm / 1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94 in.
Approx. 45 g / 1.59 oz. (excluding protective cover)
• Battery Charger LC-E17E
Compatible battery:
Recharge time:
Rated input:
Rated output:
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Weight:
Battery Pack LP-E17
Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 700 mA
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
85% or less
Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm / 2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.
(excluding power cord)
Approx. 80 g / 2.82 oz. (excluding power cord)
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except
weight for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
477
478
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
479
Third party software
This product includes third party software.
 expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
480
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as malfunction, fire, etc., caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note
that repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not
be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
481
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland
and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to the
WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive
(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing
those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in
accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal
(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or
accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in
the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g.,
on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or
to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact
your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household
waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,
or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
482
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
483
484
485
486
14
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
This chapter describes the following:
 Overview of the software for EOS cameras
 How to download and install the software on a computer
 How to download and view the Software Instruction
Manuals (PDF files)
 How to download images from the camera to a computer
487
Software Start Guide
Software Overview
This section describes an overview of various software applications for
EOS cameras. An Internet connection is required to download and
install the software. Download and installation are not possible in
environments with no Internet connection.
EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can
copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the
card.
* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot
album, movie, or slide show played back with your camera.
Digital Photo Professional
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.
* Certain functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
image processing.
488
Software Start Guide
Downloading and Installing the Software
 Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 Even if a previous version of the software is installed on your computer,
follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The previous
version will be overwritten.)
1
Download the software.
 Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
software.
 Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows: Click the displayed installer file to start the
installer.
For Macintosh: A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow
the steps below to start the installer.
(1) Double-click the dmg file.
 A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive
icon to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer file.
 The installer starts.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to install.
489
Downloading and Viewing the Software
Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
Internet connection is required to download the Software Instruction
Manuals (PDF files). Download is not possible in environments with no
Internet connection.
1
Download the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
2 View the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open
it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s
Help section.
490
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download images from the camera to a
computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1 Install the software (p.489).
an interface cable (sold
2 Use
separately) to connect the camera
to the computer.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
digital terminal with the cable plug’s
<D> icon facing the front of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to transfer the
3 Use
images.
 Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
While a Wi-Fi connection is established, the camera cannot be connected to
a computer with an interface cable.
491
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to a computer.
Install the software (p.489).
1
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 Refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual.
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the
computer.
492
Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................149
1280x720 (movie) .........................287
1920x1080 (movie) .......................287
640x480 (movie) ...........................287
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............84
AC adapter....................................422
Access lamp....................................42
Accessories.......................................3
Adobe RGB...................................187
AE lock..........................................208
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing) ..206, 402
AF
AF area selection
mode.........................129, 130, 133
AF-assist beam.................127, 404
AF groups .................................137
AF method ........................259, 316
AF operation .....................124, 256
AF point ....................................129
AF point automatic
selection ...........................129, 134
AF point red illumination ...........127
AF point selection .....................131
AF sensor .................................136
Area AF frame ..........129, 134, 260
Beeper ......................................324
Color tracking ...................135, 405
Cross-type focusing..................136
Difficult subjects for AF .....145, 266
Dual cross-type focusing ..........136
Manual focusing (MF).......146, 271
Out of focus ................53, 145, 266
Recomposing..............................87
AF-ON (AF start) button..................54
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............126
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........87, 126
ALL-I......................................... 8, 296
Ambience-based shots................... 94
Angle of view .................................. 52
Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 185
Aperture-priority AE...................... 194
Area AF frame .............. 129, 134, 260
Art bold effect ....................... 253, 394
Aspect ratio .................................. 156
Attenuator..................................... 314
Auto Lighting Optimizer ................ 175
Auto playback............................... 366
Auto power off ........................ 45, 325
Auto reset ..................................... 330
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection (AF) ...... 129, 134
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 194
B
Background blur ............................. 92
Background music........................ 368
Basic Zone modes.......................... 30
Battery ................................ 38, 40, 46
Beep (Beeper) .............................. 324
Black-and-white images... 94, 162, 166
Bluetooth function................. 423, 446
Bracketing ............................ 174, 206
Built-in flash.................................. 216
BULB (bulb exposure) .................. 199
C
C (Creative Auto) ......................... 90
Cable ............................ 369, 441, 491
Camera
Camera vibration blur............... 209
Clearing the camera settings
to default .................................. 335
Holding the camera.................... 53
493
Index
Candlelight....................................105
Cards ..............................8, 27, 41, 74
Card reminder ............................42
Formatting ..................................74
Low-level formatting ...................75
Troubleshooting....................43, 75
Write-protect switch....................41
Center-weighted average
metering........................................204
Charger.....................................35, 38
Chromatic aberration correction ...181
Cleaning (image sensor).......339, 343
Clearing the camera settings
to default .......................................335
Clipped highlights .........................389
Close-ups........................................99
Color space...................................187
Color temperature.........................169
Color tone .....................104, 105, 165
Continuous (file numbering)..........329
Continuous shooting .....................147
Contrast ........................................165
Copyright information....................332
Creative Auto ..................................90
Creative filters.......111, 251, 292, 392
Creative filters for movies .............292
Dream.......................................293
Old Movies ...............................293
Memory ....................................294
Dramatic B&W..........................294
Miniature effect movie ..............294
Creative Zone modes .....................31
Cropping (images) ........................397
Cross-type focusing ......................136
Custom Controls ...........................409
Custom Functions.........................400
494
D
Date/time........................................ 47
Daylight saving time ....................... 49
DC Coupler .................................. 422
Default settings ............................ 335
Depth-of-field preview .................. 196
Dials
Main Dial.................................... 55
Quick Control Dial...................... 56
Diffraction correction .................... 182
Digital terminal ............................... 28
Dioptric adjustment ........................ 53
Display level ................................... 59
Distortion correction ..................... 181
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) ... 378
Dragging......................................... 72
Drive mode..................... 32, 147, 149
Dual cross-type focusing.............. 136
Dust Delete Data.......................... 341
E
Electronic level ............................... 78
Erasing images ............................ 375
Err (error codes)........................... 467
Evaluative metering...................... 203
exFAT ..................................... 75, 289
Exposure compensation............... 205
Exposure level increments ........... 402
Exposure level indicator ................. 34
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup ......................................... 427
Eye-Fi cards ................................. 428
Eyepiece cover....................... 37, 427
Index
F
FE lock ..........................................219
Feature guide..................................63
FEB (Flash exposure bracketing) ...226
File extension................................331
File name ......................................329
File size.........................153, 288, 386
Filter effects ..........................163, 166
Final image simulation ..........248, 283
Fine (image-recording quality) ........32
Firmware .......................................449
First-curtain synchronization .........227
Fish-eye effect ..............113, 253, 393
Flash (Speedlite)
Built-in flash ..............................216
Custom Functions.....................228
Effective range..........................216
External flash units ...................221
FE lock......................................219
Flash control (function settings)....223
Flash exposure compensation...218
Flash mode.......................226, 227
Flash off..............................89, 118
Flash sync contacts ....................28
Flash sync speed......................222
Manual flash .....................227, 240
Red-eye reduction ....................217
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain)........................227
Wireless....................................227
Focus indicator................................84
Focus lock.......................................87
Focus mode switch .........51, 146, 271
Focusing 9 AF
Focusing point (AF point)..............129
Folder creation/selection...............327
Food..............................................104
Formatting (card initialization) ........ 74
Frame rate.................................... 287
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) (movie) .................. 275, 287
Functions available
by shooting mode ......................... 430
G
GPS.............................................. 447
Grainy B/W ................... 113, 253, 393
Grid................................. 80, 255, 317
Group Photo ................................. 102
H
Handheld Night Scene ................. 107
HD (movie) ................................... 287
HDMI ............................................ 360
HDMI CEC.................................... 370
HDR art bold................................. 115
HDR art embossed....................... 115
HDR art standard ......................... 114
HDR art vivid ................................ 114
HDR Backlight Control ................. 108
HDR movie ................................... 291
High ISO speed noise reduction... 176
Highlight alert ............................... 389
Highlight tone priority.................... 403
High-speed continuous shooting ... 147
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 389
Hot shoe ......................................... 28
Household power ......................... 422
495
Index
I
ICC profile.....................................187
Illumination (LCD panel) .................58
Image dust prevention ..................339
Image review time.........................325
Image-recording quality ................152
Images
AF point display........................388
Auto playback...........................366
Auto rotation .............................334
Erasing .....................................375
File numbering..........................329
Highlight alert ...........................389
Histogram .................................389
Index display ............................346
Jump display
(image browsing)......................347
Magnifying images ...................349
Manual rotation.........................352
Playback...........................121, 345
Protecting .................................372
Rating .......................................353
Review time..............................325
Search conditions.....................356
Shooting information ................385
Slide show ................................366
Viewing on a TV set .........360, 369
Index display.................................346
INFO button ..........121, 245, 282, 420
Interval timer .................................211
IPB (Light).....................................288
IPB (Standard) ..............................288
ISO speed.....................158, 278, 281
Automatic setting (ISO Auto)....159
ISO expansion..........................402
Maximum limit setting for
ISO Auto...................................160
496
J
JPEG............................................ 153
Jump display ................................ 347
K
Kids .............................................. 103
L
Landscape.............................. 98, 162
Language ....................................... 50
Large
(image-recording quality) ....... 32, 395
Large Zone AF ............................. 129
LCD monitor ............................. 26, 44
Adjusting angle .................... 44, 88
Brightness adjustment ............. 326
Electronic level........................... 78
Image playback................ 121, 345
Menu display...................... 67, 442
LCD panel ...................................... 33
Lens ......................................... 27, 51
Chromatic aberration correction ... 181
Diffraction correction ................ 182
Distortion correction................. 181
Lock release .............................. 52
Peripheral illumination
correction ................................. 179
Live View shooting ................. 88, 241
AF operation ............................ 256
Aspect ratio.............................. 156
Creative filters.......................... 251
Face+Tracking ......................... 260
Grid display.............................. 255
Information display................... 245
Live 1-point AF......................... 264
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 271
Metering timer.......................... 255
Possible shots.......................... 243
Quick Control ........................... 249
Smooth zone............................ 262
Index
LOCK ..............................................57
Long (bulb) exposures ..................199
Long exposure noise reduction.....177
Low-speed continuous shooting ...147
M
M (Manual exposure) ....................197
Macro photography .........................99
Magnifying images ................271, 349
Main Dial .........................................55
Manual exposure ..................197, 280
Manual focusing (MF) ...........146, 271
Manual reset .................................331
Manual selection (AF point) ..........131
Maximum burst .....................153, 154
Medium
(image-recording quality) ........32, 395
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu ...............................................67
Display level ...............................59
My Menu...................................413
Setting procedure .......................68
Settings.....................................442
Menu display...................................61
3 icon .......................................15
Metering mode ..............................203
Metering timer .......................255, 316
MF (Manual focusing) ...........146, 271
Microphone ...................................276
Miniature effect .............114, 254, 394
Miniature effect movies .................294
Mirror lockup .........................209, 406
Mode Dial..................................30, 55
Monochrome images ......94, 162, 166
MOV..............................................296
Movies .......................................... 275
AE lock..................................... 208
AF method ....................... 286, 316
Attenuator ................................ 314
Autoexposure........................... 276
Compression method............... 288
Creative filters .......................... 292
Editing out first and last scenes ... 364
Enjoying movies....................... 360
External microphone ................ 313
File size.................................... 288
Frame rate ............................... 287
Grid display .............................. 317
HDR Movie Shooting ............... 291
Information display................... 282
Manual exposure ..................... 280
Metering timer .......................... 316
Microphone ...................... 276, 313
Movie digital IS......................... 319
Movie digital zoom ................... 290
Movie recording size ................ 287
Movie Servo AF ....................... 315
Playback .......................... 360, 362
Quick Control ........................... 286
Recording time......................... 288
Sound recording....................... 313
Time-lapse movie..................... 296
Video snapshot album ............. 303
Video snapshots....................... 303
Viewing on a TV set ......... 360, 369
Wind filter ................................. 314
MP4 .............................................. 287
Multi function lock........................... 57
Multi Shot Noise Reduction .......... 176
My Menu....................................... 413
497
Index
N
NFC ..............................................446
Night Portrait.................................106
Night scenes .........................106, 107
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ........................176
Long exposures........................177
Nomenclature .................................28
Non-Canon flash units ..................222
Normal (Image-recording quality) ...32
NTSC ....................................287, 447
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)...125, 257
P
P (Program AE) ............................190
PAL .......................................287, 447
Partial metering.............................203
Peripheral illumination correction...179
Personal white balance.................172
Photobook set-up..........................382
Picture Style..................161, 164, 167
Pixel count ....................................152
Playback ...............................121, 345
Portrait ....................................97, 162
Possible recording time (movie) ...288
Possible shots.................46, 153, 243
Power
Auto power off ..........................325
Battery information ...................421
Battery level........................46, 421
Charging.....................................38
Household power .....................422
Possible shots ............46, 153, 243
Recharge performance.............421
Pressing completely........................54
Pressing halfway.............................54
498
Print order (DPOF) ....................... 378
Program AE.................................. 190
Program shift ................................ 191
Protecting images ........................ 372
Q
Q (Quick
Control) .......... 65, 117, 249, 286, 358
Quick Control Dial .......................... 56
R
Rating........................................... 353
Rating mark.................................. 353
RAW ....................... 32, 152, 153, 155
RAW+JPEG ................. 152, 153, 155
Recharging..................................... 38
Red-eye reduction........................ 217
Reduced display........................... 346
Release shutter without card........ 324
Remote control shooting .............. 423
Remote switch.............................. 427
Resizing ....................................... 395
Rotation (image)................... 334, 352
S
Saturation..................................... 165
Scene icons.......................... 247, 279
Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 84
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 227
Self-timer...................................... 149
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning ................... 339, 343
Sepia (Monochrome).............. 94, 166
Servo AF
AI Servo (AI Servo AF) ............ 126
Movie Servo AF ....................... 315
Servo (Servo AF) ..................... 258
Index
Sharpness.....................................165
Shooting information .....................385
Shooting mode guide ......................62
Shooting modes ..............................30
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ..........194
M (Manual exposure)................197
P (Program AE) ........................190
Tv (Shutter-priority AE).............192
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......84
7 (Flash Off).............................89
C (Creative Auto) .....................90
2(Portrait) .................................97
3(Landscape) ..........................98
4 (Close-up)..............................99
5 (Sports)...............................100
8 (Special scene) ................101
q (Group Photo).................102
C (Kids)...............................103
P (Food) ..............................104
x (Candlelight)....................105
6 (Night Portrait).................106
F (Handheld Night Scene)...107
G (HDR Backlight Control)...108
v (Creative filters) ..................111
G (Grainy B/W) ...................113
W (Soft focus) ......................113
X (Fish-eye effect) ..............113
Z (Water painting effect).....114
H (Toy camera effect).........114
c (Miniature effect) .............114
A (HDR art standard)........114
B (HDR art vivid) ..............114
C (HDR art bold) ...............115
D (HDR art embossed) .....115
Shooting screen ..............................59
Shooting tips ...................................64
Shutter button .................................54
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ............................227
Shutter-priority AE.........................192
Single shooting .............................147
Single-image display .................... 121
Single-point AF............................. 129
Slide show .................................... 366
Small
(image-recording quality)........ 32, 395
Smooth zone ................................ 262
Soft focus ..................... 113, 253, 393
Software ....................................... 488
Sound-recording level .................. 314
Speaker ........................................ 362
Special scene mode (SCN) .......... 101
Sports ........................................... 100
Spot metering ............................... 203
sRGB............................................ 187
O icon ........................................... 15
Stop down aperture ...................... 196
Strap ............................................... 37
System map ................................. 440
T
Temperature warning............ 273, 321
Time zone....................................... 47
Time-lapse movie ......................... 296
Tone priority.................................. 403
Toning effect (monochrome)......... 166
Touch beeping .............................. 324
Touch operation.............................. 71
Touch screen .......................... 71, 350
Touch shutter................................ 269
Toy camera effect ......... 114, 254, 394
Tripod socket .................................. 29
Troubleshooting guide .................. 452
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................. 192
499
Index
U
USB (digital) terminal....................491
V
Vari-angle LCD monitor ............44, 88
Vertical image auto rotation ..........334
Video snapshot album ..................303
Video snapshots ...........................303
Video system ................287, 369, 447
Viewfinder .......................................34
Dioptric adjustment.....................53
Electronic level ...........................78
Flicker detection .........................81
Grid.............................................80
Viewing on a TV set..............360, 369
Volume (movie playback)..............363
W
Warning icon .................................407
Water painting effect .....114, 253, 394
White balance (WB)......................169
Ambience priority (Q) ............170
Bracketing ................................174
Correction.................................173
Custom .....................................171
Personal ...................................172
White priority (Qw) ................170
Wi-Fi .............................................446
Wind filter......................................314
Wireless communication settings...446
Wireless flash photography ..........229
Z
Zone AF ........................................129
500
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of December 2016.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SW9XA210
© CANON INC. 2016
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement